MX3 Reference Guide - Honeywell Scanning and Mobility

MX3 Reference Guide - Honeywell Scanning and Mobility
MX3 Reference Guide
IMPORTANT NOTICE
LXE’s MX3 is obsolete.
This electronic manual has been made available as a courtesy to
LXE's MX3 customers. Please contact your LXE customer support
representative for assistance.
Copyright © December 2005 by LXE Inc.
All Rights Reserved
2381A137REFGD
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Notices
Notice:
LXE Inc. reserves the right to make improvements or changes in the products described in this manual at any time without
notice. While reasonable efforts have been made in the preparation of this document to assure its accuracy, LXE assumes no
liability resulting from any errors or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information contained herein. Further,
LXE Incorporated, reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes to it from time to time without any obligation
to notify any person or organization of such revision or changes.
Copyright:
This manual is copyrighted. All rights are reserved. This document may not, in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied,
reproduced, translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior consent, in writing, from
LXE Inc.
Copyright © 2005 by LXE Inc. An EMS Technologies Company.
125 Technology Parkway, Norcross, GA 30092 U.S.A. (770) 447-4224
Trademarks:
LXE® is a registered trademark of LXE Inc.
Datalight® is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc. Sockets® and ROM-DOSTM are registered trademarks of Datalight, Inc.
The original Datalight ROM-DOS User’s Guide and Datalight Sockets Developer’s Guide are copyrighted by Datalight, Inc.
Text explaining Sockets and ROM-DOS commands in this manual has been amended by LXE Inc., for reprint purposes with
Datalight Inc.’s express permission.
All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. When
manual is in PDF format: “Acrobat ® Reader Copyright © 1987-2005 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe,
the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.” applies.
Revision Notice
MX3 Reference Guide
H
Entire Manual
Updated document naming conventions.
H
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Added recommendation to connect the MX3 to an external power supply to
maintain optimum charge in the battery. Added 8500 Series scanners to
“Accessories”.
H
Chapter 4 – System
Configuration
Added Section titled “Avalanche”.
J
Entire Manual
(Note: Revision letter I is
not used)
LXE’s MX3 is obsolete as of Dec 2005. Manuals are Archived to the LXE
ServicePass website. Replacement mobile device is the MX3X.
Added new LXE logo.
Added up-to-date “Getting Help” including Manuals and Accessories.
Added “Caution – Vehicle Mounting Brackets” to the Troubleshooting
chapter.
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1
Overview .................................................................................................................... 1
Getting Help............................................................................................................... 1
Components .............................................................................................................. 2
When to Use This Guide........................................................................................... 3
Document Conventions ............................................................................................................4
Getting Started .......................................................................................................... 5
Insert Main Battery ...................................................................................................................6
About Lithium-Ion Batteries ..................................................................................................6
Attach Handstrap (Optional) ....................................................................................................8
Connect DC Power (Optional)..................................................................................................9
Power On and Off...................................................................................................................10
Turn On the MX3.................................................................................................................10
Turn Off the MX3 ................................................................................................................10
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................10
Endcaps...................................................................................................................................11
COM Port Switching............................................................................................................11
Scanner / Serial Port.............................................................................................................11
Dual Serial Port ....................................................................................................................12
PCMCIA Cards.......................................................................................................................13
PCMCIA Radio Card..............................................................................................................15
Configure the Software .......................................................................................... 16
Data Entry ................................................................................................................ 18
Keyboard Data Entry ..............................................................................................................18
Barcode Data Entry.................................................................................................................18
RS-232 Data Entry..................................................................................................................18
Terminal Emulation................................................................................................. 19
Terminal Emulation Directories .............................................................................................19
DOS Terminal Emulation User Defined Stored Forms ..........................................................20
MX3 Font/Screen Sizes ..........................................................................................................20
Manuals and Accessories ...................................................................................... 21
Manuals...................................................................................................................................21
Accessories .............................................................................................................................21
CHAPTER 2 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AND LAYOUT
23
Hardware Configuration ......................................................................................... 23
System Hardware....................................................................................................................23
Central Processing Unit ..........................................................................................................23
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
ii
Table of Contents
AT Compatible Core Logic ....................................................................................................24
System Memory......................................................................................................................24
Upper Memory Block .............................................................................................................24
Internal Flash Array................................................................................................................24
Video Subsystem ....................................................................................................................24
Power Supply..........................................................................................................................25
Memory Map ..........................................................................................................................26
COM Ports ..............................................................................................................................27
COM 1..................................................................................................................................27
COM 2 - IR Port...................................................................................................................27
PCMCIA Slots ........................................................................................................................28
Physical Controls.................................................................................................... 29
On/Off Switch.........................................................................................................................29
Critical Suspend Mode and the Off Timer ...........................................................................29
Power Status and the Status LED ...........................................................................................30
Power Management and the Keypad....................................................................................31
Suspend State .......................................................................................................................31
Critical Suspend State ..........................................................................................................31
Display ..................................................................................................................... 32
Display and Display Backlight Timer ....................................................................................33
Panning ...................................................................................................................................33
Optional Touchscreen.............................................................................................................34
Cleaning the Display ..............................................................................................................34
Display Repair......................................................................................................................34
Scan Buttons........................................................................................................... 35
Scan Buttons and the SCNR LED ..........................................................................................35
Speaker .................................................................................................................... 35
Keypads ................................................................................................................... 36
QWERTY Keys ......................................................................................................................36
ABCD Keys ............................................................................................................................36
The Overlays...........................................................................................................................37
Programmable Buttons ...........................................................................................................38
Possible Button Configurations............................................................................................38
Scan Key Function..................................................................................................................38
Enter Key Function.................................................................................................................39
Field Exit Key Function (IBM 5250/TN5250 Only)..............................................................39
2nd Key Function ...................................................................................................................39
Ctrl Key Function ...................................................................................................................39
Alt Key Function ....................................................................................................................39
Shft Key Function...................................................................................................................39
Spc Key Function ...................................................................................................................40
Mode Key Functions...............................................................................................................40
Caps Key and CapsLock Mode ............................................................................................40
Keypress Sequences................................................................................................................40
Reset Key Sequence ...............................................................................................................40
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Table of Contents
iii
DOS Key Functions Not Available on the MX3 ....................................................................40
Function LEDs........................................................................................................................41
Infrared (IR) Port ..................................................................................................... 43
Endcaps ................................................................................................................... 44
COM Port Switching ..............................................................................................................44
Scanner / Serial Port ...............................................................................................................44
Dual Serial Port ......................................................................................................................45
Storage Cradles ...................................................................................................... 46
CHAPTER 3 POWER SUPPLY
47
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 47
Main Battery Pack ................................................................................................... 47
Battery Charger.......................................................................................................................48
Low Battery Warning .............................................................................................................48
Critical Suspend State.............................................................................................................49
Backup Battery........................................................................................................ 50
Maintenance............................................................................................................................50
Battery Hot-Swapping ............................................................................................ 51
Handling Batteries Safely....................................................................................... 51
Battery Maintenance Publication............................................................................................51
CHAPTER 4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
53
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 53
Installed Software ................................................................................................... 53
Drive C Internal Flash Array ..................................................................................................53
Software Loaded on Drive C ..................................................................................................54
C Root Directory.....................................................................................................................55
\DOS Files ..............................................................................................................................56
\AGENT..................................................................................................................................56
\IRDA Files.............................................................................................................................57
\PCMCIA Files .......................................................................................................................57
\UTILS....................................................................................................................................58
Terminal Emulation Directories .............................................................................................59
Dual Terminal Emulation.....................................................................................................60
TE Selection Menu ........................................................................................................................ 60
Switching Terminal Emulators ...................................................................................................... 60
Menu Customization...................................................................................................................... 60
Radio-Specific Subdirectory...................................................................................................61
\PCTCP (2.4GHz Radio Specific Files)...............................................................................61
LXE 900Mhz Radio Files ....................................................................................................62
Configuration and Sample Files ............................................................................ 63
Sample AUTOEXEC.BAT File..............................................................................................64
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
iv
Table of Contents
For 900MHz Radio...............................................................................................................64
For 2.4GHz Radio (with ANSI Plus) ...................................................................................65
Sample CONFIG.SYS File .....................................................................................................66
Sample NET.CFG Files ..........................................................................................................67
Lucent Radio NET.CFG File ...............................................................................................67
Proxim Radio NET.CFG File...............................................................................................68
Cisco Radio NET.CFG File .................................................................................................69
Symbol FHSS 2Mb Radio NET.CFG File ...........................................................................71
Symbol 4121 11Mb Radio NET.CFG File...........................................................................72
Sample SOCKET.CFG File....................................................................................................74
Avalanche ................................................................................................................ 76
Minimum Software Baseline ..................................................................................................76
Upgrading the MX3................................................................................................................76
Directory Structure .................................................................................................................77
\AGENT ...............................................................................................................................77
\AVA ....................................................................................................................................77
\APPS ...................................................................................................................................77
\APPS\AVAF .......................................................................................................................77
BIOS Setup .............................................................................................................. 78
Accessing the BIOS Setup......................................................................................................78
Using the Keypad ...................................................................................................................78
BIOS Setup Default Values by Option...................................................................................79
Main Menu Options................................................................................................................80
Main Menu Parameters ........................................................................................................80
Parameter Changes ...............................................................................................................80
Time .....................................................................................................................................80
Date ......................................................................................................................................81
Boot ......................................................................................................................................81
Setup Msg.............................................................................................................................81
Post Msg...............................................................................................................................82
Summary ..............................................................................................................................83
Advanced Menu Options ........................................................................................................84
Parameter List ......................................................................................................................84
Power Management..............................................................................................................85
Power Mgt...................................................................................................................................... 85
CPU and Suspend Timers and RF Communication ...................................................................................85
Left Scan ........................................................................................................................................ 85
Right Scan ...................................................................................................................................... 86
CPU................................................................................................................................................ 86
Custom Setting ...........................................................................................................................................86
Disp BL.......................................................................................................................................... 87
Disp BL.......................................................................................................................................... 87
Display ........................................................................................................................................... 87
Suspend.......................................................................................................................................... 88
Off Timer ....................................................................................................................................... 89
Docked PM .................................................................................................................................... 90
Touch Wake................................................................................................................................... 90
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Table of Contents
v
Power Key...................................................................................................................................... 90
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................. 91
Keyboard ..............................................................................................................................91
Caps ............................................................................................................................................... 91
NumLock ....................................................................................................................................... 91
Rpt Delay ....................................................................................................................................... 91
Rpt Rate ......................................................................................................................................... 91
CtlAltDel........................................................................................................................................ 91
Other.....................................................................................................................................92
Font ................................................................................................................................................ 92
COM1 Pin9 .................................................................................................................................... 92
COM2 Pin9 .................................................................................................................................... 92
Exit Menu Options..................................................................................................................93
Save and Exit........................................................................................................................93
Exit w/o Save .......................................................................................................................93
Load Defaults .......................................................................................................................93
Load Previous.......................................................................................................................93
Save Changes .......................................................................................................................93
API Calls .................................................................................................................. 94
Sample Code for API Calls.....................................................................................................94
CHAPTER 5 UTILITIES
95
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 95
IrDA Lite Plus .......................................................................................................... 97
System Setup ..........................................................................................................................97
IR Communication Reliability .............................................................................................97
IrDA Lite Plus and MX3 ........................................................................................................98
Quick Start............................................................................................................................98
File Transfer Using IR Ports ................................................................................................99
File Transfer Using RS-232 Ports ......................................................................................100
Send MX3 File to a Printer ................................................................................................100
IrDA Lite Plus and MX3 and Powered Cradles ...................................................................101
File Transfer Using IR Ports ..............................................................................................101
Print Through Cradle..........................................................................................................102
IRSEND and IRECV Files ...................................................................................................103
IRSEND.C..........................................................................................................................103
IRECV.C ............................................................................................................................106
LXE BCWEDGE ..................................................................................................... 109
Parameters.............................................................................................................................109
LXE Diagnostics.................................................................................................... 111
Backup Battery Test Utility (BBTST81.EXE) .....................................................................113
Battery Discharge Utility (BBDIS81.EXE)..........................................................................113
Beeper Utility (BEEP81.EXE) .............................................................................................113
Volume Control Keys.........................................................................................................113
Communication Port Utility (COMTST81.EXE).................................................................114
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
vi
Table of Contents
RS-232 Endcap Connector .................................................................................................114
RS-232 Endcap COM Port Loopback Configuration .................................................................. 114
Display Utility (DISP81.EXE) .............................................................................................115
File Transfer Utility (LXEF.EXE)........................................................................................115
Keyboard Utility (KEY2381.EXE) ......................................................................................115
Parameter Auto-Detect Utility (PARAM81.EXE) ...............................................................116
Scanner Configuration Utility (SCU.EXE) ..........................................................................117
Set An API Function (SETAPI_4.EXE)...............................................................................118
Example – Enable COM2 for Tethered Scanner................................................................119
Touchscreen Calibration (TSCAL.EXE)..............................................................................120
Touchscreen Test (TSTEST.EXE) .......................................................................................120
The NED ASCII Text Editor................................................................................... 122
NED Default Hot Keys.........................................................................................................123
Serial File Transfer Utility..................................................................................... 124
REMSERV ...........................................................................................................................124
REMDISK ............................................................................................................................125
CHAPTER 6 RF NETWORK CONFIGURATION
127
Introduction ........................................................................................................... 127
SNMP DOS Agent.................................................................................................. 127
Avalanche .............................................................................................................. 127
NET.CFG Parameters............................................................................................ 128
Lucent Parameters ................................................................................................................128
Link Support.......................................................................................................................128
Protocol ..............................................................................................................................128
WaveLAN_Network_Name...............................................................................................128
Station_Name .....................................................................................................................128
AP_Distance.......................................................................................................................128
Microwave_Robustness .....................................................................................................129
Transmit_Rate ....................................................................................................................129
Medium_Reservation .........................................................................................................129
Card_Power_Management .................................................................................................129
Maximum_Sleep_Duration ................................................................................................130
Receive_All_Multicasts .....................................................................................................130
Enable_Encryption .............................................................................................................130
Transmit_Key_ID...............................................................................................................130
Proxim Parameters................................................................................................................131
Link Support.......................................................................................................................131
Protocol ..............................................................................................................................131
Int .......................................................................................................................................131
Port .....................................................................................................................................131
Mem#1 (ODI).....................................................................................................................131
Domain ...............................................................................................................................131
Station_type........................................................................................................................131
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Table of Contents
vii
Socket .................................................................................................................................131
Initialize_365......................................................................................................................132
Inactivity_min ....................................................................................................................132
Inactivity_sec .....................................................................................................................132
Channel...............................................................................................................................132
Subchannel .........................................................................................................................132
Mac_optimize.....................................................................................................................132
Roam_config ......................................................................................................................132
Peer_to_peer.......................................................................................................................132
Cisco Parameters ..................................................................................................................133
Link Support.......................................................................................................................133
Protocol ..............................................................................................................................133
LEAP ..................................................................................................................................133
WorldMode ........................................................................................................................133
ShortPreamble ....................................................................................................................133
AWCLEAP.........................................................................................................................133
SSID ...................................................................................................................................134
FragThreshold ....................................................................................................................134
RTSThreshold ....................................................................................................................134
DataRateX ..........................................................................................................................134
RefreshInterval ...................................................................................................................134
PowerSaveMode.................................................................................................................134
MaxPowerSave...................................................................................................................134
NodeName..........................................................................................................................134
WEP enable ........................................................................................................................135
Diversity .............................................................................................................................135
PortBase – IRQ – Memory - Socket...................................................................................135
BusType .............................................................................................................................135
Frame..................................................................................................................................135
LongRetryLimit..................................................................................................................135
WEPDOS............................................................................................................................136
Symbol Parameters ...............................................................................................................137
Link Support.......................................................................................................................137
Protocol ..............................................................................................................................137
ESS_ID...............................................................................................................................137
cardservices ........................................................................................................................137
socketservices.....................................................................................................................137
mode ...................................................................................................................................137
ioaddress.............................................................................................................................137
memory...............................................................................................................................137
interrupt ..............................................................................................................................138
powermgmt.........................................................................................................................138
performance_index.............................................................................................................138
Auth_type ...........................................................................................................................138
Encrypt-Key# .....................................................................................................................138
encrypt_enable ...................................................................................................................138
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
viii
Table of Contents
Encrypt_Key_ID ................................................................................................................139
Encrypt_Enable_Index .......................................................................................................139
diversity..............................................................................................................................139
Tx_rate ...............................................................................................................................139
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack........................................................................................ 140
Introduction ..........................................................................................................................140
Bootp ..................................................................................................................................140
DHCP .................................................................................................................................140
Setting SOCKETS.CFG Parameters.....................................................................................141
Set IP Address ....................................................................................................................141
Set ARP INIT .....................................................................................................................141
Set Interface........................................................................................................................141
Set Router IP (Gateway only) ............................................................................................142
Set Domain Name Server ...................................................................................................142
Display IP Address.............................................................................................................142
Options ...............................................................................................................................142
SOCKET.CFG Parameters ...................................................................................................143
domain ................................................................................................................................143
iface ....................................................................................................................................143
interface..............................................................................................................................143
ip.........................................................................................................................................146
param..................................................................................................................................147
route....................................................................................................................................149
tcp .......................................................................................................................................151
CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING
155
Problem Determination Tips ................................................................................ 155
Startup Problems .................................................................................................. 156
Bypassing the Configuration Files .......................................................................................156
Verifying Boot Order............................................................................................................157
Missing COMMAND.COM .................................................................................................157
Edit BIOS Setup .................................................................................................................158
Copy File ............................................................................................................................159
Setting System Time and Date .............................................................................................160
Hardware Problems .............................................................................................. 161
Power Source ........................................................................................................................161
Keypad..................................................................................................................................161
Caution – Vehicle Mounting Brackets .................................................................................162
Display..................................................................................................................................163
Hard Disk Drive....................................................................................................................163
PCMCIA Cards.....................................................................................................................164
Upper Memory Conflicts ...................................................................................................165
IRQ Assignments ...............................................................................................................165
Optional Devices ..................................................................................................................166
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Table of Contents
ix
Radio Problems..................................................................................................... 167
Software Related Problems.................................................................................. 168
FTP Kernel............................................................................................................................168
Convert MX3 from MS-DOS to ROM-DOS........................................................................169
Memory .................................................................................................................. 169
Conventional Memory ..........................................................................................................169
Extended Memory ................................................................................................................169
Power On Self Test (POST) .................................................................................. 170
POST Error Messages...........................................................................................................170
Messages Probably Requiring Repair...................................................................................171
POST Beep Codes ................................................................................................................171
If You Need Further Assistance........................................................................... 172
Before You Call....................................................................................................................172
APPENDIX A KEY MAPS
173
Keypads ................................................................................................................. 173
Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies for Batch Units ...............................................................174
IBM 3270 and TN3270 Terminal Emulator Keypad............................................................179
IBM 5250 and TN5250 Terminal Emulator Keypad............................................................179
APPENDIX B TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
181
Physical Specifications ........................................................................................ 181
Environmental Specifications.............................................................................. 183
LXE MX3 and Endcaps........................................................................................................183
Power Supplies .....................................................................................................................183
US AC Wall Adapter..........................................................................................................183
International AC Adapter ...................................................................................................184
Display Specifications .......................................................................................... 184
Radio Specifications............................................................................................. 185
PCMCIA 900 MHz Type III.................................................................................................185
LXE 6400 PCMCIA 2.4 GHz Type II..................................................................................185
LXE 6500 PCMCIA 2.4 GHz Type II..................................................................................185
PCMCIA Cisco 2.4 GHz Type II .........................................................................................186
PCMCIA Symbol 2Mb 2.4 GHz Type II..............................................................................186
PCMCIA Symbol 11Mb 2.4 GHz Type II............................................................................186
APPENDIX C COMMANDS
187
Introduction ........................................................................................................... 187
ROM-DOS Commands .......................................................................................... 187
ANSI.SYS.............................................................................................................................188
ATTRIB.EXE .......................................................................................................................189
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
x
Table of Contents
CHKDSK.EXE .....................................................................................................................190
COMMAND.COM ...............................................................................................................191
DELTREE.EXE....................................................................................................................192
FORMAT.COM....................................................................................................................193
HIMEM.SYS ........................................................................................................................194
MEM.EXE ............................................................................................................................196
MODE.COM ........................................................................................................................197
MORE.COM.........................................................................................................................198
NED.EXE and NED.CFG.....................................................................................................199
PRINT.COM.........................................................................................................................201
REMDISK.EXE....................................................................................................................202
REMSERV.EXE...................................................................................................................203
SYS.COM.............................................................................................................................204
VER ......................................................................................................................................205
XCOPY.COM.......................................................................................................................206
ROM-DOS 6.22 Command Summary................................................................... 207
INDEX
MX3 Reference Guide
211
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Table of Contents
xi
Illustrations
Figure 1-1 Front of MX3 .....................................................................................................................................2
Figure 1-2 Back of MX3......................................................................................................................................2
Figure 1-3 Main Battery.......................................................................................................................................6
Figure 1-4 Battery Compartment .........................................................................................................................7
Figure 1-5 Main Battery.......................................................................................................................................7
Figure 1-6 MX3 With Handstrap Installed ..........................................................................................................8
Figure 1-7 DC Power Supply...............................................................................................................................9
Figure 1-8 Location of the Power Button ..........................................................................................................10
Figure 1-9 Standard Range Scanner / Serial Port Endcap..................................................................................11
Figure 1-10 Dual Serial Port ..............................................................................................................................12
Figure 1-11 PC Card Location...........................................................................................................................13
Figure 2-1 System Hardware .............................................................................................................................23
Figure 2-2 Location of the Power (PWR) Button ..............................................................................................29
Figure 2-3 Power Status and the Status LED.....................................................................................................30
Figure 2-4 MX3 Display....................................................................................................................................32
Figure 2-5 Scan/Enter/FLD EXIT Buttons ........................................................................................................35
Figure 2-6 Speaker Location..............................................................................................................................35
Figure 2-7 The QWERTY Keypad ....................................................................................................................36
Figure 2-8 The ABCD Keypad ..........................................................................................................................36
Figure 2-9 ABCD Keypad - ANSI/LDS/PC Overlay ........................................................................................37
Figure 2-10 QWERTY Keypad - ANSI/LDS/PC Overlay ................................................................................37
Figure 2-11 TN3270/3270 Overlay for QWERTY Keypad ..............................................................................37
Figure 2-12 TN5250/5250 Overlay for QWERTY Keypad ..............................................................................37
Figure 2-13 Programmable Buttons (Field Exit / Scan / Enter).........................................................................38
Figure 2-14 Function LEDs ...............................................................................................................................41
Figure 2-15 2nd, ALT, CTRL, SHFT, CAPS .....................................................................................................41
Figure 2-16 SCNR, BATT B .............................................................................................................................42
Figure 2-17 STAT, BATT M, CHGR................................................................................................................42
Figure 2-18 Infrared Port - COM2 Port .............................................................................................................43
Figure 2-19 Standard Range Scanner / Serial Port Endcap................................................................................44
Figure 2-20 Dual Serial Port ..............................................................................................................................45
Figure 2-21 RS-232 Pinouts ..............................................................................................................................45
Figure 2-22 9-Pin RS-232 Description ..............................................................................................................45
Figure 2-23 Desktop Cradle...............................................................................................................................46
Figure 2-24 Vehicle Mounted Cradle ................................................................................................................46
Figure 3-1 Main Battery Pack............................................................................................................................47
Figure 3-2 LXE Multi-Charger ..........................................................................................................................48
Figure 3-3 Insert Main Battery in Charger.........................................................................................................48
Figure 5-1 RS-232 Serial Connector (COM1 or COM2) ................................................................................114
Figure 5-2 RS-232 Endcap COM Port Loopback Configuration ....................................................................114
Figure A-1 ABCD Keypad and QWERTY Keypad ........................................................................................173
Figure A-2 IBM 3270 Specific Keypad...........................................................................................................179
Figure A-3 IBM 5250 Specific Keypad...........................................................................................................179
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
xii
MX3 Reference Guide
Table of Contents
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Chapter 1 Introduction
Overview
The MX3 is a rugged, portable, mobile PC-compatible computer capable of wireless data
communications. The MX3 can transmit information using either a 900 MHz or 2.4 GHz radio
(with an internally mounted antenna). It can store information for later transmission through an
RS-232 or InfraRed port. The MX3 is horizontally oriented and features electroluminescent
backlighting for the display. The keys on the keypad are constructed of a phosphorescent material
that can easily be seen in dimly lighted areas.
The MX3 is a DOS compatible computer designed to run as a batch unit or run software
applications such as LXE’s Terminal Emulator applications (ANSI Plus, LDS Plus, DOS 5250,
DOS 3270, TN3270 and TN5250).
Please refer to the “MX3 User’s Guide” for MX3 installation and user instruction.
Please refer to the “MX3 Cradle Reference Guide” for technical information
relating to the Desk Top and Vehicle Mount cradles.
Note:
The 900MHz radio is obsolete.
Note:
Always store unused mobile devices with a fully charged main battery pack installed.
LXE recommends the mobile device be connected to an external power source
periodically to retain optimum power levels in the main battery pack and the backup
battery.
Getting Help
LXE user guides are available on CD and they can also be viewed/downloaded from the LXE
ServicePass website. Contact your LXE representative to obtain the LXE Manuals CD or access
to the LXE ServicePass website. You can also check the LXE ServicePass website for the latest
manual releases.
Note:
Obsolete/archived manuals are not available on the LXE Manuals CD. They are
available for download from the ServicePass website only.
You can get help from LXE by calling the telephone numbers listed on the LXE Manuals CD, in
the file titled “Contacting LXE”. This information is also available on the LXE website.
Explanations of terms and acronyms used in this manual are located in the file titled "LXE
Technical Glossary" on the LXE Manuals CD and on the LXE website.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
2
Components
Components
1. Endcap
2. Display
3. Field Exit or Scan
or Enter
4. Beeper
5. On/Off Button
6. 2nd LED
7. Alt LED
8. Ctrl LED
9. Shift LED
10. Caps LED
11. Scanner LED
12. Backup Battery
LED
13. Status LED
14. Main Battery LED
15. Charger LED
16. Scan or Enter
Figure 1-1 Front of MX3
1. Endcap
2. Leather Handstrap
Connector
3. IR Port
4. Cradle Input
Contracts
5. Main Battery
Figure 1-2 Back of MX3
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
When to Use This Guide
3
When to Use This Guide
As the reference for LXE’s MX3 computer, this guide provides detailed information on its
features and functionality. Use this reference guide as you would any other source book -- reading
portions to learn about the MX3, and then referring to it when you need more information about a
particular subject. This guide takes you through all aspects of the installation and configuration of
the LXE MX3.
Operating instructions for the general user are contained in the “MX3 User’s Guide”.
This chapter, “Introduction”, briefly describes this reference guide structure, contains setup and
installation instruction, briefly describes data entry processes, and explains how to get help.
Chapter 2 “Physical Description and Layout” describes the function and layout of the
configuration, controls and connectors on the MX3.
Chapter 3 “Power Supply” describes the power sources and battery charging stations.
Chapter 4 “System Configuration” takes you through the BIOS Setup and memory maps, the
MX3 file structure, describes LXE’s Terminal Emulation programs compatible with the MX3 and
contains instructions for panning the display.
Chapter 5 “Utilities” explains the function of MX3-specific utilities.
Chapter 6 “RF Network Configuration” describes the functions and delivers instruction on
editing the NET.CFG and SOCKET.CFG files. It also contains information relating to the SNMP
DOS agent.
Chapter 7 “Troubleshooting” solutions are split into several areas, including a list of Power On
Self Test (POST) messages and run time messages. The solution may be found in one area or it
may be a combination of the solutions in several areas.
Appendix A “Key Maps” describes the keypress sequences for the different keypads – batch,
IBM 3270, and IBM 5250.
Appendix B “Technical Specifications”
environmental, display and the radios.
lists
technical
specifications
for
physical,
Appendix C “Commands” describes ROM-DOS command files.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
4
When to Use This Guide
Document Conventions
This reference guide uses the following document conventions:
Convention
Meaning
ALL CAPS
All caps are used to represent disk directories, file names, and application
names.
Menu|Choice
Rather than use the phrase “choose the Save command from the File
menu”, this manual uses the convention “choose File|Save”.
“Quotes”
Indicates the title of a book, chapter or a section within a chapter (for
example, “Document Conventions”).
<
>
Indicates a key on the keyboard (for example, <Enter> ).
Indicates a reference to other documentation.
Differences in operation or commands due to radio type.
ATTENTION
!
Keyword that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow.
Attention symbol that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow.
Also, when marked on product, means to refer to the manual or user’s
guide.
International fuse replacement symbol. When marked on the product, the
label includes fuse ratings in volts (v) and amperes (a) for the product.
Note:
Caution
!
WARNING
!
DANGER
!
MX3 Reference Guide
Keyword that indicates immediately relevant information.
Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Keyword that indicates a imminent hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Getting Started
5
Getting Started
Note:
When your MX3 is pre-configured, the radio, PCMCIA card and endcaps are assembled
by LXE to your specifications. You may only need to install a storage/charging cradle or
handstrap.
This section’s instructions are based on the assumption that your new system is pre-configured
and requires only accessory installation (e.g. handstrap or cradle) and a power source.
LXE recommends that installation or removal of accessories be performed on a clean, well-lit
surface. When necessary, protect the work surface, MX3, and components from electrostatic
discharge.
In general, the sequence of events is:
1.
Insert fully charged battery.
2.
Install accessories.
3.
Power the MX3 on.
4.
Configure the software.
Note:
New batteries must be fully charged prior to use. This process takes up to four hours in
an LXE Multi-Charger or LXE Multi-Charger Plus and up to eight hours using the MX3
internal charger.
Refer to the documentation received with the charger for complete information.
Refer to the “Integrated Scanner Programming Guide” to set up the SE923
scanner using barcodes.
Note:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
At this time you should create a DOS boot SRAM card for the MX3. The bootup card can
be used when the MX3 has corrupt or missing operating system files. Please refer to a
commercially available DOS user manual for boot disk instruction.
MX3 Reference Guide
6
Getting Started
Insert Main Battery
Note:
New batteries must be charged prior to first use. This process takes approximately four
hours in an LXE Multi-Charger or Multi-Charger Plus.
1. Front Side
2. Contacts, Main Battery
3. Contacts, Cradle Output
4. Retaining Clips
5. Top Side
6. Back Side
7. Contacts, External Cradle
Input
Figure 1-3 Main Battery
About Lithium-Ion Batteries
Li-Ion batteries (like all batteries) gradually lose their capacity over time (in a linear fashion) and
never just stop working. Use the following chart to determine when to replace the battery:
LXE Part No. 2381A376BATT1600
100% capacity
80% capacity
1400 mAh minimum
1120 mAh minimum
LXE Part No. MX3A378BATT
100% capacity
80% capacity
1800 mAh minimum
1440 mAh minimum
Deciding when to replace a Main Battery pack in the MX3 is difficult to quantify because it is
very application specific. 1000 mAh may be the cutoff for one customer who uses the computer
frequently, while 300 mAh may be perfectly fine for a customer who occasionally uses the
computer. You need to determine the point at which battery life becomes unacceptable for your
business practices and replace the main battery pack before that point.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Getting Started
7
Figure 1-4 Battery Compartment
The MX3 Battery Compartment is located at the bottom of the back of the computer. The arrows
in the figure above point to the battery contacts in the computer.
Figure 1-5 Main Battery
Place the battery in the compartment, making sure the side of the battery with six contacts matches
up with the battery contacts in the computer battery compartment. Do not slide the battery
sideways into the compartment.
Firmly press the battery into the compartment until it clicks. The battery is now securely fastened
to the MX3.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
8
Getting Started
Attach Handstrap (Optional)
An elastic handstrap is available for the MX3. Once installed, the handstrap provides a means for
the user to secure the computer to their hand. It is adjustable to fit practically any size hand and
does not interfere with battery charging when the MX3 is in a docking station.
Figure 1-6 MX3 With Handstrap Installed
Tool Required: #1 Phillips Screwdriver
Installation
1.
Remove the MX3 from the docking station.
2.
Put the unit in Suspend mode or turn the unit off to prevent accidental key presses when you
are attaching the handstrap.
3.
Place the MX3, with the screen facing down, on a flat stable surface.
4.
Attach the handstrap to the MX3 with the screws and washers provided.
5.
Test the strap’s connection making sure the MX3 is securely connected to each end of the
strap connectors.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Getting Started
9
Connect DC Power (Optional)
Note:
When an external power supply is used to power these products, the external power
supply should be UL Listed, with LPS or Class 2 outputs rated 12V, minimum 1Amp.
1. AC Input Cable
2. To MX3 Power
Jack
Figure 1-7 DC Power Supply
The MX3 connects to any of the following power supplies through the DC Power Jack on the
endcap:
•
US AC/DC 12V power supply
•
International AC/DC 12V power supply
1.
Insert the barrel connector into the MX3 power jack and push in firmly.
2.
The CHGR LED above the keypad illuminates when the MX3 is receiving power
through the power jack. The Main Battery automatically recharges when the MX3 is
connected to an external power source.
Note:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
When the MX3 is receiving external power from a cradle, the cradle Status LED and the
CHGR LED on the MX3 are illuminated.
MX3 Reference Guide
10
Getting Started
Power On and Off
Turn On the MX3
Press and hold the Power button until the display turns on. The power button is located above the
ESC key on the keypad.
Figure 1-8 Location of the Power Button
When the MX3 is powered on, the display will begin scrolling power-on information as software
and drivers are loaded. When the display has stopped scrolling and a DOS C: prompt is displayed
or an application begins, the power on sequence is complete.
Turn Off the MX3
Hold the Power button down. The unit will emit three short beeps and one long beep. After the
long beep the MX3 will power down. The Power button and the display will turn off. The Power
key function is configured in the BIOS Setup.
Note:
Tapping the Power button will place the MX3 in Suspend mode.
Troubleshooting
The MX3 will not turn off – force a Power Off by holding the Power key down for 15 seconds
and the MX3 will power off. Locate and correct the problem before powering the MX3 back on –
e.g. IRQ conflict, very low battery power, radio conflict, unexpected software application result,
etc.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Getting Started
11
Endcaps
Refer to the “MX3 User’s Guide” for the section titled “Scanner Warnings and
Labels” for important laser safety information before using the scanner.
The Scanner/Serial Port and the Dual Serial Port are designated COM 1. The COM2 port is the IR
port.
Note:
Your configuration may be different than those shown below.
COM Port Switching
The default COM 2 port is always the IR port on the back of the MX3, regardless of the endcap
installed on the MX3.
On the Standard Range Scanner / Serial Port endcap COM 1 is the Integrated Scanner port.
On the Dual Serial Port endcap the COM1 port is the serial port on the left side of the endcap
when the display is facing you.
An API can be run to switch power to the DB9 Serial port. If a tethered scanner is connected to
the Serial Port without switching the power to the COM2 port (serial port), the scanner will not
work.
Scanner / Serial Port
1. DC Power Jack
2. Scanner Aperture
3. Serial Port (COM 2)
Figure 1-9 Standard Range Scanner / Serial Port Endcap
The internal barcode scanner scans only when the Scan button is pressed. Scan buttons have no
effect on externally attached barcode scanners (see previous section titled “COM Port
Switching”).
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
12
Getting Started
Dual Serial Port
1. DC Power Jack
2. Dual Serial Ports
(COM 1 and COM 2)
Figure 1-10 Dual Serial Port
The MX3 can be equipped with endcaps to perform different tasks. All MX3s are equipped with a
beeper that is not connected to endcap functioning.
Each endcap type fulfills a different function. Changes may be required in application software
when installing a different type of endcap.
Endcaps are installed and configured by LXE.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Getting Started
13
PCMCIA Cards
When removing or installing PCMCIA cards, protect the MX3 internal components from
electrostatic discharge.
Use and operation of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA)
device (e.g. PC card) is dependent upon both the type of device installed and the application(s)
running on the computer.
When installed, the PC card will not function properly unless the proper PC card
management software is installed in the PC card/MX3. (See Chapter 4, “System
Configuration.) Make sure the proper software is pre-loaded and PC cards are
properly configured.
There are two PC card slots in the MX3. The slot in the middle is Slot 1 and the slot near the side
of the MX3 is Slot 0. Both PC card slots will accept PC radio cards and PC data cards. Slot 1 is
5mm tall and Slot 0 is 2.2mm tall.
Note:
Do not remove the radio card when installing a PC card.
Figure 1-11 PC Card Location
Requirement: A screwdriver (not supplied by LXE)
Preparation
LXE recommends that installation of the PC card be performed on a clean, well-lit surface.
Using a screwdriver, loosen the endcap and set both the endcap and the screws aside.
Installation
Slide the PC Card, connector side first, into the slot until it seats. Use caution not to pull or snag
the antenna connector.
If the PC Card is difficult to seat in the slot, remove the card, turn it around and re-install.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
14
Getting Started
Removal
Grasp the top of the PC Card and pull it straight upward to remove.
Use caution not to pull or snag the antenna connector on the Radio card, if installed.
If you anticipate keeping the PC card out of the MX3 for a long period of time place it in an
enclosed storage container. Store in an area that is protected from dirt, moisture, and electrostatic
contact.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Getting Started
15
PCMCIA Radio Card
When removing or installing the radio, protect the MX3 internal components and the radio
from electrostatic discharge.
Slot 1 accepts the following PCMCIA radio cards:
•
LXE 6500 System 2.4GHz radio
•
LXE 6200 System 900 MHz radio
Slot 0 accepts the following PCMCIA radio card:
•
LXE 6400 System 2.4GHz radio
When installed, the radio will not work unless the proper radio driver software is
installed in the computer. (See Chapter 4, “System Configuration”.)
Make sure the proper software is pre-loaded and a compatible radio network is
available.
Preparation
LXE recommends that installation of the radio card be performed on a clean, well-lit surface.
Using a screwdriver, loosen the endcap and set both the endcap and the screws aside.
Installation
1.
Slide the PCMCIA Radio, connector side first, into the slot until it seats.
2.
The radio antenna connector must be positioned up and toward the front of the MX3 (near the
display). If the PCMCIA Radio is difficult to seat, remove the Radio card, turn it around and
re-install.
3.
Gently snap the antenna cable into the connector on the PCMCIA Radio. Use caution not to
damage either the antenna cable connector or the connector on the radio.
Note:
4.
A 6400 System radio has one antenna cable. A 6500 System antenna has two
antenna cables. Connect all antenna cables to the PCMCIA radio.
Reinstall the endcap.
Removal
1.
Disconnect the antenna cable from the radio, using caution not to damage the radio connector
or the antenna cable connector.
2.
Move the cable aside and grasp the top of the radio card and pull straight up until the radio is
removed from the MX3 unit.
If you anticipate keeping the radio card out of the MX3 for a long period of time place it in an
enclosed storage container. Store in an area that is protected from dirt, moisture, and electrostatic
contact.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
16
Configure the Software
Configure the Software
Please have the following information available before setting up your computer for the first time:
•
IP Address
•
Network SSID number of the Access Point
In Brief . . .
1.
Insert a fully charged battery into a hand-held computer. Connect a vehicle mounted
computer to an external power source.
2.
Power up the computer.
3.
Using the NED editing utility, edit the NET.CFG file in the PCTCP subdirectory.
4.
Using the NED editing utility, edit the SOCKET.CFG file in the PCTCP subdirectory.
5.
Using the TE utility, edit the Terminal Emulation parameters (if needed).
6.
Reboot.
How To Edit DOS Files on Your Computer Using NED.EXE
The following DOS file edit commands are required for setup. These commands are not case
sensitive. The following keystrokes will control ths cursor.
PgDn - Move cursor down
PgUp - Move cursor up
2nd PgUp - Move up a page
2nd PgDn - Move down a page
2nd CTRL PgUp - Move to the top of the file
2nd CTRL PgDn - Move to the bottom of the file
The cursor may not be visible on the screen. Use the key commands above to find the cursor when
editing the NET.CFG and SOCKET.CFG files.
If the cursor is at the bottom of the file, the PgDn key and the 2nd PgDn keystrokes will not help
you find the cursor.
How To Use F5 During Bootup
1.
Power the computer on.
2.
Press F5 when “Starting ROM-DOS” appears on the screen. It may flash quickly on the
screen then disappear.
3.
Press the Enter key at the Time prompt. Press the Enter key at the date prompt.
4.
Type CLS and press the Enter key.
5.
Type “Path=C:\DOS” and press the Enter key.
6.
The DOS C:\ prompt appears on the screen.
How To Edit the NET.CFG File
Note:
1.
While editing the NET.CFG file, do not press Enter until all changes are completed.
At the C:\ prompt, type CD PCTCP. Then press Enter.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Configure the Software
17
2.
At the C:\PCTCP prompt, type NED NET.CFG. Then press Enter.
3.
You should be at the top of the file. Use the PgDn (or down arrow) key to move down the
screen. You may not see the cursor at first.
4.
Move the cursor to the line of code that reads:
SSID
“” ; Must match Cisco Access Point setting
ESS_ID “” ; Must match Symbol Access Point setting
WaveLan_Network_Name “” ; Must match Lucent/Orinoco/Agere Access Point setting
5.
At this line, move the cursor to the right using the End (or the right arrow) key
6.
Edit the line to contain the network name of the Access Point the computer is to connect
through.
7.
If you will be using WEP or another authentication protocol, please contact your wireless
network administrator to acquire the WEP/LEAP keys. Please refer to Chapter 6, “RF
Network Configuration” for the WEP key procedure.
8.
After edits are complete, press Alt F to access the menu and save.
9.
Move the cursor down to Save or press Enter or press F9.
10. To exit, press Alt F.
11. Move the cursor to Exit and press Enter or press Alt F4.
How To Edit the SOCKET.CFG File
Note:
While editing the SOCKET.CFG file, do not press Enter until all changes are completed.
1.
At the C:\ prompt, type CD PCTCP. Press Enter.
2.
At the C:\PCTCP prompt, type NED SOCKET.CFG. Press Enter.
3.
You should be at the top of the file. Use the PgDn key (or down arrow) to move down the
screen. You may not see the cursor at first.
4.
Move the cursor down to the line that reads:
IP address 0.0.0.1/16 // This is the default setting and allows the DHCP server to set the
computer’s IP address to be set each time the computer is powered
up.
5.
If a static IP address is to be set for the computer, edit this statement to read:
IP address ‘assigned IP address’/xx
where ’xx’ is the number of subnet bits for the assigned IP address.
Note:
If a static address was set, then a route might also be required if there is a gateway
between the Access Points the system uses and a Session Manager (if used).
6.
After edits are complete, press Alt F to access the menu.
7.
Move the cursor down to Save or press Enter or press F9.
8.
To exit, press Alt F.
9.
Move the cursor to Exit and press Enter or press Alt F4.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
18
Data Entry
Data Entry
Note:
The MX3 will not run Microsoft® Windows® products i.e. Windows 3.X, Windows For
Workgroups, Windows 95/98, Windows NT, etcetera.
The MX3 computer accepts data entry from the keyboard, barcode scanner and the RS-232 input
port when an LXE terminal emulation (TE) program is running and on batch (non-TE) units.
Keyboard Data Entry
Once the terminal emulation program is started, data can be entered with the MX3 keypads.
Keyed data can be entered into a data field and transmitted to the host. You might respond to a
prompt sent by the host application with a keypad entry, such as a menu listing choices for your
next action.
Barcode Data Entry
The MX3 supports an accessory barcode label reading device. Keyboard data entries can be mixed
with barcode data entries. Any scanner that decodes the barcode internally and outputs an RS-232
data stream may be used. The serial port parameters may need to be changed (using the terminal
emulation’s configuration utility) to match the parameters of the scanner.
RS-232 Data Entry
The MX3 accepts input from an RS-232 device connected to either RS-232 port, COM1 or
COM2.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Terminal Emulation
19
Terminal Emulation
All terminal emulation radio controlled data flows and exchanges are over the radio to the 62XX,
64XX or 65XX units, then to the computer network and then to a host computer. The LXE
Network Management System (for 900MHz systems) or Client Configuration Manager (for
2.4GHz systems), as part of the wired network, can remotely configure the MX3’s terminal
emulation parameters.
•
MX3’s with 900MHz spread spectrum radios communicate only with 62XX Base
Stations with installed 900MHz radios.
•
MX3’s with 64XX series 2.4GHz spread spectrum radios communicate only with
64XX Access Points with installed 64XX 2.4GHz radios.
•
MX3’s with 65XX series 2.4GHz spread spectrum radios communicate only with
65XX Access Points with installed 65XX 2.4GHz radios.
Please refer to the system specific terminal emulation reference guide for instruction when using
an MX3 in a specific TE environment. A list of LXE reference guides is located at the end of this
chapter in the section titled “Manuals”.
Terminal Emulation Directories
Please refer to the specific Terminal Emulation’s reference guide for complete
instructions.
Batch MX3’s do not have terminal emulation (TE) files and may or may not have a radio card.
When a need exists to convert a batch MX3 to a TE unit or a different radio card, contact LXE
Customer Services for assistance.
Note:
900 MHz radio files are loaded in the Terminal Emulation subdirectories, i.e. /APLUS,
/LDSPLUS, /IBM (for both 3270 and 5250).
Following are the directory names containing the TE program files:
/APLUS
/APLUS
/LDSPLUS
/LDS24
/IBM
/IBM
/IBM24
/IBM24
Note:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
ANSI Plus with 2.4 GHz radio
ANSI Plus with 900 MHz radio
DOS LDS Plus with 900 MHz radio
DOS LDS Plus with 2.4 GHz radio
DOS IBM 3270 with 900 MHz radio
DOS IBM 5250 with 900 MHz radio
TN3270 with 2.4 GHz radio
TN5250 with 2.4 GHz radio
Dual TE’s are supported on MX3 computers with an 8 Meg. Flash drive. MX3’s with a 4
Meg. Flash drive DO NOT support dual TE’s.
MX3 Reference Guide
20
Terminal Emulation
DOS Terminal Emulation User Defined Stored Forms
DOS terminal emulations have the following space requirements for user defined stored forms:
ANSI
LDS
3270
5250
2K required for each form
520 bytes required for each form
1K required for each form
1K required for each form
MX3 Font/Screen Sizes
The fonts/screen sizes available on the MX3 in Batch mode or at the DOS prompt are:
•
30 rows by 80 columns
•
15 rows by 80 columns
Please refer to the specific Terminal Emulation Reference Guide for font and screen sizes
available when using the TE software.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Manuals and Accessories
21
Manuals and Accessories
Manuals
The following manuals are available on the LXE Manuals CD:
The following manuals used for the MX3 are available from LXE:
User Guides (for the daily user)
• MX3 User's Guide – English (ROM-DOS)
• MX3 User's Guide – German (ROM-DOS)
Reference Guides (for the SysAdmin)
• ANSI Plus Reference Guide
• DOS API Programming Guide
• DOS Autoconfigurator Installation Instruction
• Integrated Scanner Programming Guide - DOS
• LDS Plus Reference Guide
• LXE Computers and WaveLink Avalanche User's Guide
• MX3 Reference Guide (ROM-DOS)
• SNMP Agent Reference Guide
• TN3270 Terminal Reference Guide
• TN5250 Terminal Reference Guide
Networking
• Telnet Manager Reference Guide
Peripherals
•
•
•
•
•
•
Getting the Most from Your Batteries
LXE Technical Glossary
MX3 Cradle Reference Guide
MX3 Multi-Charger User's Guide
MX3 Multi-Charger Plus User's Guide
PCMCIA Card Management and LXE DOS Computers
Archived (Available on the LXE ServicePass website)
• MX3 User’s Guide (MS-DOS)
• MX3 User’s Guide – German (MS-DOS)
• MX3 Reference Guide (MS-DOS)
• ANSI Plus Reference Guide (900MHz) Rev H
• LDS Plus Reference Guide (900MHz) Rev E
• 3270 DOS TE Reference Guide
• 3270 Programmer’s Reference Guide
• 5250 DOS TE Reference Guide
• 5250 Programmer’s Reference Guide
• 6200 Network Management Guide
Accessories
Tethered Scanners (Obsolete)
Scanner, LS3603, Std, 8’ Cbl, EC
Scanner, LS3603, Std, 8’ Cbl, US
Scanner, LS3603, Std, 20’ Cbl, US
Scanner, LS3203, Ext Rng, 8’ Cbl, EC
Scanner, LS3203, Ext Rng, 8’ Cbl, US
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
8010LS3603STC08DEC
8010LS3603STC08DUS
8010LS3603STC20DUS
8011LS3203ERC08DEC
8011LS3203ERC08DUS
MX3 Reference Guide
22
Manuals and Accessories
Scanner, LS3203, Ext Rng, 20’ Cbl, US
Scanner, 5312IP, 7’ Cbl, WW
Scanner, 530052IP, 7’ Cbl, WW
Scanner, 530072IP, 7’ Cbl, WW
Scanner, 530092IP, 7’ Cbl, WW
Scanner, 5312IP, 15’ Cbl, US
Scanner, 530052IP, 15’ Cbl, US
Scanner, 530072IP, 15’ Cbl, US
Scanner, 530092IP, 15’ Cbl, US
Scanner, LS3408ER, 9’ Cbl, US See Note
Scanner, LS3408FZ, Fuzzy Logic, 9’ Cbl, US See Note
8011LS3203ERC20DUS
8101IP5312XXC07DWW
8104IP530052C07DWW
8105IP530072C07DWW
8110IP530092C07DWW
8101IP5312XXC15DUS
8104IP530052C15DUS
8105IP530072C15DUS
8110IP530092C15DUS
8520A326SCNRERDA9F
8510A326SCNRFZYDA9F
PCMCIA Cards
SRAM Card, 2 MB
SRAM Card, 4 MB
SRAM Card, 2 MB, Low Temp
SRAM Card, 4 MB, Low Temp
9000A102PCC2SRAM
9000A103PCC4SRAM
9000A104PCC2SRAMLO
9000A105PCC4SRAMLO
Holding Accessories
Strap, Hand, Nylon
Nylon Holster for use with Belt
Nylon Hip Flip
Nylon Case with Shoulder Strap
2381A407HANDSTRAP
2381A401HOLSTER
2381A403HIPFLIP
2381A402CASE1
Miscellaneous
Pen, Stylus, Black, 2335
2335A501PASSIVEPEN
Battery Chargers and Battery
6 Unit Charger
5 Unit Charger/Analyzer, US
5 Unit Charger/Analyzer, WW
Battery, Li-Ion, 1400 mAh
Battery, Li-Ion, 1800 mAh
2381A377CHGR6
9000A377CHGR5US
9000A377CHGR5WW
2381A376BATT1600
MX3A378BATT
Cradles and Cradle Power Supplies
Desktop Cradle 1
Vehicle Mount Cradle1
AC Power Supply, US
AC Power Supply, International, No power cord
Power Cord, AC, US
Power Adapter, Bare Wire 12 VDC
Power Adapter, 24-72 VDC, 20 Watts
Power Adapter, 110-240 VAC
2381A001DESKCRADLE
2381A003VMCRADLE
9000A301PSACUS
9000A302PSACWW
9000A066CBLPWRAC
1300A053CBL12ML3
1300A301PS24WW
1300A303PSACWW
Cables for Cradle and MX3 Serial Ports
Cable, Printer/PC, DA-9F to DB-25M, 6 ft.
Cable, PC, DA-9F to DA-9F, 6 ft.
9000A053CBL6D9D25
9000A054CBL6D9D9
Note: When using the 8500 Series tethered scanners, the tethered scanner Power Mode must be
set to “Reduced Power Mode”to conserve MX1 battery life. The reduced power mode setting will
not impact performance of the 8500 series scanner. The default mode is “Continuous On”. Please
refer to the manufacturer’s user guide for instruction
1
Power Adapter Required.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout
Hardware Configuration
System Hardware
The MX3 hardware configuration is shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-1 System Hardware
Central Processing Unit
The LXE MX3 CPU is an Intel® 486 running at 25 MHz.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
24
Hardware Configuration
AT Compatible Core Logic
The LXE MX3 utilizes AT-compatible core logic. The MX3 supports the following I/O
components of the core logic:
•
Two PCMCIA slots (Slot 1 supports Type I, II or III PCMCIA cards, Slot 0 supports
Type I or II PCMCIA cards.).
•
One InfraRed port.
•
One Digitizer Input port (Touch screen).
•
Two serial ports in two configurations (internal scanner port and a serial port option
and the second configuration consists of two traditional serial ports).
System Memory
Main system memory is 4MB Internal Flash Array and 4MB on-board RAM. The CPU also
contains a 1MB BIOS Flash.
Upper Memory Block
The upper memory area, or Upper Memory Block (UMB) consists of memory between 640KB
and 1 MB. It occupies most of the address range A0000H-FFFFFH and includes the areas used to
shadow various system software components.
Internal Flash Array
The Internal Flash Array (IFA) is used to store all of the system files on the 4MB C drive that are
used during system startup.
Video Subsystem
The display has a 640 pixel (horizontal) by 240 pixel (vertical) format which, depending on the
font used, provides 15 rows of 80 characters in VGA 8 x 16 text mode. It provides 30 rows of 80
characters in 8 x 8 text mode and 17 rows of 80 characters in 8 x 14 text mode.
Character size is 2.28mm (width) by 4.92mm (height) in VGA 8 x 16 text mode and 2.28mm
(width) by 2.28mm (height) in 8x8 text mode. The display contrast is adjustable with the contrast
control keys or key sequences. Backlighting is available and can be configured through the BIOS
Setup Utility.
The display controller supports VGA text and graphics modes.
An optional touch feature is available. The touch feature is for batch, Client Server or non-TE
applications. The Touch option allows mouse functions (pointing and clicking on the display or
Signature Capture) to be performed with either the touch of a finger or an LXE approved stylus.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Hardware Configuration
25
Power Supply
The LXE MX3 uses two batteries for operation.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
•
A replaceable Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) battery pack. The battery pack recharges while
in the MX3 with the MX3 in a powered cradle or with the optional external power
sources attached. The main battery pack can be removed from the MX3 and inserted
in the LXE Multi-Charger or Multi-Charger Plus which simultaneously charges up
to six battery packs in four hours.
•
An internal 50 mAh Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) backup battery. The backup battery is
recharged directly by the main battery when it is installed. Full charging of the
backup battery may take several hours. The recharging of the backup battery is
automatically controlled by the MX3. The backup battery must be replaced by
qualified service personnel.
MX3 Reference Guide
26
Hardware Configuration
Memory Map
Map Physical Address Range
Size (kB)
Function
000 00000 - 000 9FFFF
640
DRAM
000 A0000 - 000 AFFFF
64
VGA Video RAM -- SMI Space, SMIACT# is
Active
000 B0000 - 000 BFFFF
64
VGA Video RAM -- SMI Space, SMIACT# is
Active
000 C0000 - 000 C7FFF
32
Shadowed VGA BIOS
000 C8000 - 000 C9FFF
8
PCMCIA
PCM Boot When Enabled & Bootable Card
Present
000 CA000 - 000 CBFFF
8
PCMCIA
000 CC000 - 000 CFFFF
16
PCMCIA
000 D0000 - 000 DFFFF
64
IFA Memory Window
000 E0000 - 000 E7FFF
32
IFA BIOS
000 E8000 - 000 EFFFF
32
Shadowed System BIOS
000 F0000 - 000 FFFFF
64
Shadowed System BIOS
001 00000 - 003 FFFFF
4k
DRAM - lower 4MB
004 00000 - 00F FFFFF
12k
DRAM
010 00000 - F8E FFFFF
3967k
F8F 00000 - F8F FFFFF
1k
Flash BIOS Device - Alias
F90 00000 - F9E FFFFF
15k
Unused – 15kB
F9F 00000 - F9F FFFFF
1k
Flash BIOS Device - Alias
FA0 00000 - FAE FFFFF
15k
Unused – 15kB
FAF 00000 - FAF FFFFF
1k
Flash BIOS Device - Alias
FB0 00000 - FBE FFFFF
15k
Unused – 15kB
FBF 00000 - FBF FFFFF
1k
Flash BIOS Device - Alias
FC0 00000 - FCE FFFFF
15k
Unused – 15kB
FCF 00000 - FCF FFFFF
1k
Flash BIOS Device - Alias
FD0 00000 - FDE FFFFF
15k
Unused – 15kB
FDF 00000 - FDF FFFFF
1k
Flash BIOS Device - Alias
FE0 00000 - FEE FFFFF
15k
Unused – 15kB
FEF 00000 - FEF FFFFF
1k
Flash BIOS Device - Alias
FF0 00000 - FFE FFFFF
15k
Unused – 15kB
FFF 00000 - FFF DFFFF
896
Flash BIOS Device - BIOS Block - 14 x 64k
Sectors
FFF E0000 - FFF FFFFF
128
Flash BIOS Device - Boot Block - 15th 64k
Sector & 8 x 8k Sectors
MX3 Reference Guide
Unused - 3.9MB
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Hardware Configuration
27
COM Ports
The MX3 has two serial ports available in three configurations.
In the first configuration, both COM1 and COM2 are connected to individual D-9 connectors on
the endcap.
In addition, COM2 is software switchable between the D-9 serial port and the internal IR port
located on the back of the unit.
In the third configuration, COM1 is connected to an internal SE923 scanner and COM2 is
software switchable between the D-9 connector on the endcap and the internal IR port on the back
of the unit.
Power to the COM ports may be turned off using a terminal emulation configuration utility.
COM 1
This port supports 4 signals, instead of the 8 signals supported by a standard PC COM port. There
are two hardware selectable configurations of the COM1 port:
•
COM1 connected to a D-9 serial connector
•
COM1 connected to a scanner
The signals supported by this communication port are:
•
RX
Receive Data
•
TX
Transmit Data
•
RTS
Request to Send
•
CTS
Clear to Send
Though the signal Ring Indicator (RI) is not supported, the MX3 can use this signal as a wake-up
event. Alternatively, this signal can be set up as +5V output on Pin 9 of the D-9 connector.
COM 2 - IR Port
The IR port provides bi-directional half-duplex IR communication at a maximum baud rate up to
115k (although restricted if using IrDA software to 19.2k). The IR port supports the Slow IrDA
PHY Layer standard.
This port supports 4 signals, instead of the 8 signals supported by a standard PC COM port. There
are two software selectable configurations of the COM2 port
•
COM2 connected to a D-9 serial connector
•
COM2 connected to the internal IR transceiver
The following signals supported by this communication port are:
•
RX
Receive Data
•
TX
Transmit Data
•
RTS
Request to Send
•
CTS
Clear to Send
Though the signal RI is not supported, this signal can be used as a wake-up event. Alternatively,
this signal can be set up as +5V output on Pin 9 of the D-9 connector.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
28
Hardware Configuration
PCMCIA Slots
The MX3 features two internal PCMCIA slots that conform electrically to PCMCIA 2.1
specifications. The PC slots are accessible by the use of a Phillips screwdriver to first remove the
endcap. Slot 1 is in the middle and Slot 2 is near the side of the MX3.
PC Cards
Slot 1 accepts cards of Types I and II. Slot II accepts cards of types I, II and III.
The slots, and the PC cards in them, are managed by Phoenix PicoCard software products which
refers to the Middle Slot as slot 1 and the Outside Slot as slot 0. The software can be used to
format PC cards.
When formatting PC cards, Phoenix PicoCard identifies the PC cards by slot number and DOS
drive letters. For example, an ATA PC card formatted in slot 0 is given disk drive letter D and an
ATA PC card formatted in slot 1 is given disk drive letter E. If the MX3 is booted from the ATA
PC Card in slot 0, the drive automatically becomes Drive C. The on-board flash drive changes to
drive D until the MX3 is rebooted without an ATA card in Slot 0. An ATA PC Card formatted in
Slot 1 is always Drive E and cannot boot the MX3 from Slot 1. If the MX3 is booted from an
SRAM card in Slot 0, the drive automatically becomes Drive A. The on-board flash drive remains
as Drive C.
See “PCMCIA Card Management and LXE DOS Computers”, for further information.
Radio Cards
Slot 1 accepts the PCMCIA radio cards identified in Appendix C, “Technical Specifications”.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Physical Controls
29
Physical Controls
On/Off Switch
The power (on/off) switch is a push button located at the upper left portion of the keypad.
When the system is turned off, the current contents of RAM are lost. Save any needed data and
exit in an orderly fashion from any running programs before turning the system off.
Figure 2-2 Location of the Power (PWR) Button
The Power button is used to turn the MX3 on and off and place it into the Suspend state. The
button will beep when pressed and beep again every second while it is held down.
How To
•
Turn the MX3 off
Hold the Power key down for 4 beeps (signifies 3 or more
seconds) then release.
•
Turn the MX3 on
Hold the Power key down until the display turns on.
•
Force the Suspend state
Tap the Power key (1 beep). The Suspend state is useful for
breaks or when swapping batteries as the unit does not need
to be turned off prior to replacing the Main Battery.
•
Wake from Suspend
Wake the MX3 from Suspend (before the 5 minute timer
expires) using any of the following:
•
•
Note:
Tap Power key
Pen-touch on a touch screen display (if configured)
The ability of the Touch screen activation to wake up the MX3 is configurable in BIOS
Setup. The ability of the Power Key to turn off or suspend the MX3 is configurable in the
BIOS Setup.
Critical Suspend Mode and the Off
Timer
The MX3 is automatically turned Off when the Off Timer expires. The Off Timer runs when the
MX3 is in Critical Suspend mode. The MX3 automatically goes into Critical Suspend mode when
the main battery is dead or removed. The Off Timer default is 5 minutes. The value can be
adjusted using the BIOS Setup.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
30
Physical Controls
Power Status and the Status LED
Figure 2-3 Power Status and the Status LED
The Status LED is located above the 7 key on the keypad. The LED changes color and state
depending on power status.
Status LED
Condition
Off
MX3 is Off.
OR
The MX3 is powered On and the display is On.
Steady Green
The MX3 is powered On and the display is Off. Press any key to turn the
display On.
Blinking Green
The MX3 is in the Suspend state. Tap the Power key to exit the Suspend
state. To turn the MX3 off, hold the Power key down for 4 beeps to turn the
MX3 off. There may be a brief wait while the MX3 synchronizes with the
RF network.
Steady Red
Main Battery Low Warning or Low Main Battery. Replace the main battery
or place the unit in a powered storage cradle or connect the MX3 to
external power using the jack input.
Blinking Red
Main Battery Power Failure or the Main Battery is depleted, the MX3 is in
Critical Suspend mode. The MX3 is drawing power from the backup
battery. Replace the main battery or place the unit in a powered storage
cradle or connect the MX3 to external power using the jack input. The
MX3 will turn off in 5 minutes (default or the value selected in BIOS Setup
for the Off Timer limit) if no action is taken.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Physical Controls
31
Power Management and the
Keypad
Status LED is Steady Green. When the MX3 is in the Display Off state, any keypress returns the
computer to the On state and the display activates. The key pressed (key value) is not sent to the
Operating System or application.
If the 2nd, Ctrl, Shift, or Alt keys were active (and the LEDs were illuminated) when the MX3
entered Display Off or Suspend, the modifier keys and their LEDs are cleared when the MX3
wakes up.
Suspend State
Status LED is Blinking Green. The display and all backlights are turned off.
The purpose of the Suspend state is to reduce the power consumption of the unit to a very low
point and still retain the condition of the processor and memory. This state is primarily meant for
breaks (lunch, afternoon) or for battery hot-swapping. The Suspend state is entered when the unit
is inactive for the amount of time set by the Suspend Timer (typically 5 minutes) or the user
tapped the Power key (1 beep) to place the MX3 in the Suspend state.
The Suspend Timer is reset every time the MX3 wakes up and normal activity occurs (keypresses,
touch screen, etc.). The Suspend Timer can be changed from its default time (5 minutes) in
incremental steps of one minute up to 63 minutes. The Suspend state can be disabled (Suspend
Timer set to 0) when the MX3 is docked/not docked or by setting PM Mode when Docked to
None in BIOS Setup.
If the 2nd, Ctrl, Shift, or Alt keys were active (and the LEDs were illuminated) when the MX3
entered Suspend, the function keys and their LEDs are cleared when the MX3 wakes up.
Critical Suspend State
Status LED is Blinking Red. The display and all backlights are turned off.
The Critical Suspend state is only entered when the main battery has failed or has been removed
and the unit is being powered by the backup battery. Once in this state, a fully charged backup
battery will provide enough energy to keep the unit in this state for at least 5 minutes. As the
energy in the backup battery is depleted, the unit will turn off and a reboot will be required.
Since the backup battery is supplying power in this state, the MX3 limits the amount of time it
stays in the Critical Suspend state via the Off Timer. The Off Timer is configurable in incremental
steps of one minute (the default is 5 minutes). The backup battery will supply power for at least
five minutes. As the Off Timer expires the unit will turn off and a reboot will be required.
Note:
Setting the Off Timer to zero will then turn the MX3 off immediately when the main
battery is removed.
Once in the Critical Suspend state (and the main battery has not been replaced) the MX3 is
automatically turned Off when the Off Timer expires or the backup battery is depleted. When a
fully charged main battery is installed, the MX3 transitions to the Suspend state. Exit the Suspend
state by tapping the Power key. If the MX3 has a touch screen display, and configured for touch, a
pen-touch will exit the Suspend state.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
32
Display
Display
Figure 2-4 MX3 Display
The MX3 display is a transflective monochrome VGA LCD unit capable of supporting gray
scales. The display window is 640 pixels (horizontal) x 240 pixels (vertical). VGA graphics are
supported with this display.
Four font sizes are supported. The choice between font sizes is made in the BIOS Setup. Font size
selection may be overridden by a user supplied application, such as the ANSI Plus TE.
Character size is 2.28mm (width) by 4.92mm (height) in VGA 8x16 text mode and 2.28mm
(width) by 2.28mm (height) in 8x08 text mode.
Depending on the font size used, the display window’s size in DOS mode is:
Note:
Font Size in Pixels
Rows
Columns
8x8
30
80
8x16
15
80
Please refer to the specific Terminal Emulation Reference Guide for font and screen
sizes available when using the TE software.
The display is automatically turned off when the MX3 enters the Suspend state, Critical Suspend
state or the Display Timer expires (Display Timer default is 15 seconds).
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Display
33
Display and Display Backlight Timer
When the Display Timer expires the display is turned off. The default value for this parameter is
15 seconds.
When the Display Backlight Timer expires the display backlight is turned off. The default value
for this parameter is 3 seconds.
Both values can be adjusted using the BIOS Setup. The Display Backlight parameter must be set
to Timed to enable the Display Backlight Timer function.
Any of the following will wake the display and display backlight:
•
Display update by host or currently running application on the MX3
•
Any key on the keypad
•
Pen-touch on a touch screen display
When the display wakes up, the Display Backlight Timer will begin the countdown again. When
any of the above events occurs prior to the timer expiring, the timer starts the countdown again.
The ability of Touch screen activation to wake up the MX3 is configurable in BIOS Setup.
Panning
Pan Up - 2nd+Ctrl+Up Arrow
Pan Down - 2nd+Ctrl+Down Arrow
The MX3 display window can be panned up and down using keypress sequences so the user can
view an entire virtual 640 x 480 pixel screen. Initially, using the default 8 x 16 pixel font, the top
half (15 rows x 80 columns) of a virtual screen is displayed.
When the host sends a virtual screen to the MX3, the display window cannot show the whole
virtual screen. The display window can only show parts of the virtual screen.
The virtual screen is the full 25 line x 80 column screen generated by the host computer. An
example of a virtual screen is the screen you view when you use a personal computer. The display
window is the part of the virtual screen viewed on the MX3.
Note:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Panning functions may be overridden by terminal emulation programs running on the
MX3.
MX3 Reference Guide
34
Display
Optional Touchscreen
An optional Touchscreen is available. Touchscreen provides a means of inputting information into
the MX3 by touching the screen using either the user’s finger or by using the LXE approved
stylus (the Passive Pen – see Chapter 1, “Introduction”, section titled “Accessories”.)
Touchscreen operation is not affected by Display Backlighting.
Touchscreen operation is affected by the Display mode. If the display is off, a touch to the display
will turn on the display but no touch data will be sent to the running application until the next
touch.
Touchscreen operation is determined by a user supplied application and is not supported by LXE
TE programs.
Note:
When the MX3 has a Lucent radio (LXE System 6500) and a touchscreen, the NET.CFG
file must include the line
Stack_Size 256
before the Enable_Encryption line. See Chapter 6, "RF Network Configuration", for
details.
Cleaning the Display
Keep fingers and rough or sharp objects away from the scan aperture and display. If the glass
becomes soiled or smudged, clean only with a standard household cleaner such as Windex®
without vinegar or use Isopropyl Alcohol. Do not use paper towels or harsh-chemical-based
cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the glass surface. Use a clean, damp, lint-free
cloth. Do not scrub optical surfaces. If possible, clean only those areas which are soiled.
Lint/particulates can be removed with clean, filtered canned air.
Display Repair
There are no user-repairable or replaceable components in the LXE MX3 Display system.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Scan Buttons
35
Scan Buttons
Figure 2-5 Scan/Enter/FLD EXIT Buttons
There are two buttons, one on each side of the display. The buttons are programmable. Depending
on the type of unit purchased (e.g. IBM specific or batch), the buttons will function as an internal
barcode scanner key or a numeric keypad Enter key. Scan keys have no effect on scanners
tethered to the MX3.
The 5250/TN5250 specific MX3 uses the left scan key as the Field Exit key. It is labeled FLD
EXIT.
See next section titled “Keypads”, subsection “Programmable Buttons”.
Scan Buttons and the SCNR LED
The SCNR LED, located above the keypad, illuminates during a barcode scanner function. It is
affected by internal scanner functions. The 5250/TN5250 specific MX3 FLD EXIT button, when
pressed, has no effect on the SCNR LED.
•
Red - scanning.
•
Green - good scan.
•
Unlit - scanner is inactive.
Speaker
Figure 2-6 Speaker Location
The MX3 Speaker has a loudness of at least 90 dB at 10 cm measured from the front of the unit.
The Speaker volume is adjustable via the keypad or by the application through the use of an API
call. There are 8 distinct volume levels. The minimum volume level is 0 (no sound) with a default
setting of midrange. The volume sticks at maximum and minimum levels. The Speaker beeps
when the main battery is low otherwise it is under the control of the application and other software
currently active.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
36
Keypads
Keypads
There are two keypads and three overlays available for the MX3. All keypads are phosphorescent.
A phosphorescent keypad does not use a keypad backlight but glows in dim/dark areas after
exposure to a light source.
All keypads are installed and configured by LXE.
The keymaps (keypress sequences) are located in Appendix A, “Key Maps”.
QWERTY Keys
Figure 2-7 The QWERTY Keypad
ABCD Keys
Figure 2-8 The ABCD Keypad
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Keypads
37
The Overlays
There are four keypad overlays. One for the ABCD keypad and three for the QWERTY keypad.
Figure 2-9 ABCD Keypad - ANSI/LDS/PC Overlay
Figure 2-10 QWERTY Keypad - ANSI/LDS/PC Overlay
Figure 2-11 TN3270/3270 Overlay for QWERTY Keypad
Figure 2-12 TN5250/5250 Overlay for QWERTY Keypad
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
38
Keypads
Programmable Buttons
Figure 2-13 Programmable Buttons (Field Exit / Scan / Enter)
The buttons to the left and right of the display can be programmed by the System Administrator to
perform the following functions:
Scan
Pressing this key activates the laser scanner. See the following section
titled “Scan Key Function”.
Enter
Pressing this key confirms a forms entry or transmits information. See the
following section titled “Enter Key Function”.
Field Exit
IBM 5250/TN5250 units only. Pressing this key exits an input field. See
the following section titled “Field Exit Key Function”.
Possible Button Configurations
Endcap
Right Button 2
Left Button
Blank
Numeric keypad Enter
Numeric keypad Enter
Scanner/serial
Scan
Numeric keypad Enter
Serial/Serial
Numeric keypad Enter
Numeric keypad Enter
TN5250/5250 Terminal Emulation only:
Blank
Numeric keypad Enter
Field Exit w/ FLD EXIT label
Scanner/Serial
Scan
Field Exit w/ FLD EXIT label
Serial/Serial
Numeric keypad Enter
Field Exit w/ FLD EXIT label
Scan Key Function
(MX3’s with Scanner endcaps only.) The Scan key activates the scanner when a
scanner endcap is installed and the Scan button is pressed. The internal scanner
scans only when the Scan button is pressed. A Scan button press has no effect on
externally attached scanners.
2
Regardless of the type of endcap installed, the default value of the Right Button is always Scan.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Keypads
39
Enter Key Function
The Enter key is used to confirm a forms entry or to transmit information. How it is
used is determined by the application running on the computer.
Field Exit Key Function (IBM 5250/TN5250 Only)
The Field Exit key is used to exit an input field. If the field is an Auto Enter field, the
auto transmit function is activated. This key function is present on the IBM
5250/TN5250 specific keypad only.
2nd Key Function
The 2nd key is used to activate the 2nd functions of the keypad. Printed on many keys at
the upper left corner are small characters that represent the 2nd function of that key.
Using the 2nd key activates the second key function. Note that the 2nd key only stays
active for one keystroke. Each time you need to use the 2nd function you must press the
2nd key. To cancel a 2nd function before pressing another key, press the 2nd key again.
When the 2nd function is active, the 2nd LED illuminates.
Ctrl Key Function
The Ctrl key function is only active when running the 3270 terminal emulation or the
5250 terminal emulation program. The Ctrl key (blue characters) enables the control
functions of the keypad. This function is similar to a regular keyboard’s Control key.
Note that the Ctrl key only stays active for one keystroke. Each time you need to use a
Ctrl function, you need to press the Ctrl key before pressing the desired character key.
When the Ctrl function is active, the Ctrl LED illuminates.
Alt Key Function
The Alt key enables the alternate functions of the keypad. This function is similar to a
regular keyboard’s Alt key. Note that the Alt key only stays active for one keystroke.
Each time you need to use an alternate function, you need to press the Alt key before
pressing the function key. When the Alt function is active, the Alt LED illuminates.
Shft Key Function
The Shft key enables the shifted functions of the keypad. This function is similar to a
regular keyboard’s Shift key. Note that the Shift key only stays active for one keystroke.
Each time you need to use a Shifted function, you need to press the Shft key before
pressing the function key. When the Shft function is active, the Shft LED illuminates.
When the Shft key is pressed the next key is determined by the major key legends, i.e.,
the alpha keys display lower case letters when CAPS is On and alpha characters are
capitalized.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
40
Keypads
Spc Key Function
The Spc key adds a space to the line of data on the display. This function is similar to a
regular keyboard’s Spacebar. Note that the Spc key only stays active for one keystroke.
Mode Key Functions
Caps Key and CapsLock Mode
This function is similar to a regular keyboard’s CapsLock key. Note that the CapsLock mode stays
active until the CapsLock key sequence is pressed again. Each time you need to use a Caps
function, you need to press the Caps key sequence first. To cancel a CapsLock function press the
Caps key sequence again. When the CapsLock mode is active, the Caps LED illuminates.
CapsLock key sequence is 2nd + F1.
Keypress Sequences
See Appendix A, “Key Maps” for key maps for all keypads.
Reset Key Sequence
Reset Key Sequence is Ctrl + Alt + 2nd + Dot.
The Reset Key sequence can be disabled in the BIOS Setup. See Chapter 4, “System
Configuration”.
DOS Key Functions Not Available on the MX3
Prnt Scrn
A function that is available at the DOS prompt on a desktop PC. The Prnt Scrn as a
system function requires a parallel port and the MX3 has only serial ports.
Sys Req
A function that is available at the DOS prompt on a desktop PC. Sys Req is for use
in a multi-tasking environment to switch between various running applications. The
MX3 is not a multi-tasking computer, nor is DOS in general considered a multitasking environment.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Keypads
41
Function LEDs
Figure 2-14 Function LEDs
Across the top of the keypad are LEDs that provide visual cues to current computer operation.
When the LED is not illuminated, the function is inactive.
Figure 2-15 2nd, ALT, CTRL, SHFT, CAPS
LED
When illuminated ...
2nd
The 2nd functions of the keypad. When illuminated, the next keypress is a 2nd
keypress. Orange or unlit.
ALT
The Alternate functions of the keypad. When illuminated, the next keypress is an
ALT keypress. Orange or unlit.
CTRL
The Control functions of the keypad. When illuminated, the next keypress is a
CTRL keypress. Orange or unlit.
SHFT
Uppercase or lowercase keyed input. When illuminated, the next letter is an
uppercase letter. Orange or unlit.
CAPS
When illuminated, uppercase letters are active until the CAPS key sequence is
pressed again. Orange or unlit.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
42
Keypads
Figure 2-16 SCNR, BATT B
LED
SCNR
When illuminated ...
Barcode scanner function, affected by the internal scanner.
•
•
•
BATT B
Red, scanning.
Green, good scan.
Unlit, scanner is inactive.
Backup Battery. When illuminated, the backup battery is charging. When unlit,
the Backup Battery is fully charged. Orange or unlit.
Figure 2-17 STAT, BATT M, CHGR
LED
When illuminated ...
STAT
Status Indicator. See section titled “Power Status and the Status LED”.
BATT M
Main Battery. When illuminated, main battery charge is low. The main battery is
charged by powered docking cradles.
•
•
CHGR
Charger. The MX3 is seated in a powered storage cradle (or docking station).
•
•
•
•
MX3 Reference Guide
Red, Main Battery low warning.
Unlit, Main Battery is charged.
Red, Main Battery is charging.
Green, battery charge is complete.
Orange, error (contact LXE Customer Services).
Unlit, MX3 is not seated properly or is not in a powered cradle or connected
to a power jack.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Infrared (IR) Port
43
Infrared (IR) Port
Figure 2-18 Infrared Port - COM2 Port
At the back of the MX3 Computer there is an Infrared (IR) Data Port. The IR Port is designed to
provide a data link between the MX3 and a similarly equipped piece of equipment such as a
printer. The IR port is the MX3’s COM2 port and is a bi-directional half-duplex communication
port. It supports baud rates up to 115k (although restricted if using IrDA software to 19.2k).
The IR operating envelope has a distance range of 2 cm (.79 inches) to 1 meter (3.2 feet) with a
viewing angle of 30 degrees.
The MX3 uses LXE’s IrDA Lite Plus protocol to send data in both directions, but not
simultaneously. When sending data through the IR port, make sure the IR port on the first MX3
and the IR port on the second MX3 are in close proximity to each other. IrDA is not required and
not used by terminal emulation programs.
See Chapter 5, “Utilities”, for further information about using IrDA Lite Plus.
When the MX3 is docked in a cradle, the Status LED on the cradle is red when data is being
transmitted through the IR port.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
44
Endcaps
Endcaps
Note:
Your configuration may be different than those shown below.
COM Port Switching
The default COM 2 port is always the IR port on the back of the MX3, regardless of the endcap
installed on the MX3.
On the Standard Range Scanner / Serial Port endcap COM 1 is the Integrated Scanner port.
On the Dual Serial Port endcap the COM1 port is the serial port on the left side of the endcap
when the display is facing you.
An API can be run to switch power to the DB9 Serial port. If a tethered scanner is connected to
the Serial Port without switching the power to the COM2 port (serial port), the scanner will not
work.
Scanner / Serial Port
Refer to the MX3 User’s Guide and the section titled “Scanner Warnings and Labels”
for important laser safety information before using the scanner.
The MX3 Barcode Scanner is used to collect barcode data from any nearby compatible barcode
label. Depending on the size of the barcode, size of bars and spacing and quality of the barcode,
the scanner is used to read barcodes between 3” and 30”. The barcode scanner reads UPC/EAN,
Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Code 128, Codabar and MSI symbologies.
1. DC Power Connector
2. Scanner Aperture
(COM 1)
3. Serial Port (COM 2)
Figure 2-19 Standard Range Scanner / Serial Port Endcap
The internal barcode scanner scans only when the Scan button is pressed. Scan buttons have no
effect on tethered barcode scanners connected to the RS-232 port on the MX3 or a cradle
containing an MX3. The SCNR LED illuminates during any internal scanner activation.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Endcaps
45
Dual Serial Port
1. DC Power Connector
2. Dual Serial Port
(COM 1 and COM 2)
Figure 2-20 Dual Serial Port
RS-232 connection is made through an RS-232 Serial Port if installed. The connector is an
industry-standard RS-232. The connector includes a PC/AT standard 9-pin “D” male connector.
1
3
2
6
7
5
4
8
9
Figure 2-21 RS-232 Pinouts
PIN
SIGNAL
DESCRIPTION
1
DCD
Not Connected
2
RXD
Receive Data - Input
3
TXD
Transmit Data - Output
4
DTR
Not Connected
5
GND
Signal/Power Ground
6
DSR
Not Connected
7
RTS
Ready To Send - Not Connected
8
CTS
Clear To Send - Not Connected
9
RI
or
+5V DC
Ring Indicator - Input (Available for computer
wakeup. See Power Management)
Figure 2-22 9-Pin RS-232 Description
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
46
Storage Cradles
Storage Cradles
There are two types of cradles for LXE’s MX3 mobile computer: a desk top cradle for tabletop
charging / communication applications and a vehicle mount cradle for vehicle mounted charging /
communication applications. See the “MX3 Cradle Reference Guide”.
Figure 2-23 Desktop Cradle
Figure 2-24 Vehicle Mounted Cradle
The cradles give the MX3 the ability to communicate with a host computer and other equipment.
In addition, using wall AC adapters or DC/DC converters, the cradle transfers power to the
internal charging circuitry of the MX3 and the MX3, in turn, recharges the Main Battery. The
MX3 can be either on or off while in the cradle.
The MX3 can be either on or off while in the cradle. The MX3 can be inserted and removed from
the cradle with one hand.
Cables are available from LXE for connecting the cradle to a printer, a personal computer or a
barcode printer. Tethered scanners (for RS-232 cradle connection) are also available from LXE.
See Chapter 1, “Introduction”, section titled “Manuals and Accessories”.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Chapter 3 Power Supply
Introduction
The MX3 computer is designed to work with a Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) battery pack from LXE.
The LXE MX3 receives continuous power from two batteries. There is a Lithium-Ion Main
Battery Pack that can be recharged separately by an LXE approved battery charging unit. The
Main Battery is recharged, if required, while installed in a powered cradle or when the MX3 is
connected to external power using the power jack. There is a 50 mAh Nickel-Cadmium (NiCd)
Backup Battery inside the MX3 that is recharged only by the Main Battery Pack.
The MX3 maintains the date and time for a minimum of four days using a Main Battery that has
reached the Low Warning point and a fully charged Backup Battery. The MX3 retains data,
during a Main Battery hot swap, for at least 5 minutes.
Figure 3-1 Main Battery Pack
Note:
New batteries must be charged prior to use. This process takes up to four hours in an
LXE Multi-Charger or Multi-Charger Plus and eight hours when the MX3 is connected
to external power through its power jack.
Refer to the documentation received with the battery charger for complete
information.
Main Battery Pack
The main battery pack has a rugged plastic enclosure that is designed to withstand the ordinary
rigors of an industrial environment. Exercise care when transporting the battery pack making sure
it does not come in contact with excessive heat or any power source other than the LXE MultiCharger, Multi-Charger Plus or the MX3 unit.
When the Main Battery Pack is properly installed in the unit it provides up to eight hours of
operation depending upon operation and accessories installed. The battery pack is resistant to
impact damage and falls of up to four feet to a concrete surface.
Under normal conditions it should last approximately eight hours before requiring a recharge. The
more you use the scanner or the transmitter, the shorter the time required between battery
recharges.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
48
Main Battery Pack
Battery Charger
Figure 3-2 LXE Multi-Charger
The MX3 Main Battery Pack can be charged in the LXE Multi-Charger or Multi-Charger Plus.
Figure 3-3 Insert Main Battery in Charger
Lower the battery pack straight into the battery charger pocket and push it down firmly until the
retaining clip catches on the retaining pins.
Do not “slam” the battery into the charging cup or slide it in sideways.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in damage to the main battery or the charger.
Low Battery Warning
It is recommended that the Main Battery Pack be removed and replaced when its energy depletes.
When the Low Battery Warning sounds (alternating one second beeps) do an orderly shut down of
the MX3, minimizing the operation of any installed devices and insuring any information is saved
that should be.
Note:
MX3 Reference Guide
Once you receive the Low Battery Warning, you have approximately 5 minutes to
perform an orderly shutdown and replace the main battery pack before the unit powers
off. The Low Battery Warning will transition to Critical Suspend before the computer
powers off.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Main Battery Pack
49
Critical Suspend State
The Critical Suspend state or mode can only be entered because of a Main Battery Power failure.
A Main Battery Power failure can occur because the battery’s energy has been depleted or the
battery has been removed.
When the MX3 is in the Critical Suspend state the main battery LED illuminates, the System LED
blinks red, all peripherals are shut down, the CPU clock is stopped, power is removed from the
PCMCIA card(s) and the MX3 may beep. The MX3 is saving the state prior to the main battery
failing and cannot be used.
If a new fully charged main battery is installed before the Off Timer expires the MX3 will
transition to the Suspend state. To resume operation, tap the Power key for one beep.
If the Off Timer expires the MX3 will turn itself off and all unsaved information is lost. Insert a
fully charged main battery and press the Power button to turn the MX3 back on.
Note:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
The Off Timer can be configured in the BIOS Setup (see Chapter 4, “System
Configuration”.)
MX3 Reference Guide
50
Backup Battery
Backup Battery
The MX3 has a backup battery that is designed to provide limited-duration electrical power in the
event of Main Battery Pack failure. The Backup Battery is a 50 mAh Nickel Cadmium (NiCd)
battery that is factory installed in the unit. The need for recharging of the backup battery is
automatically detected and controlled by the MX3. The energy needed to charge the backup
battery comes from the Main Battery.
It takes several hours of operation before the Backup Battery is capable of supporting the
operation of the computer. The duration of Backup Battery life is dependent upon operation of the
MX3, its features and any operating applications.
The backup battery is replaced by LXE.
Note:
When there is no external power supplied to the computer, the unit is powered by the
backup battery. When the backup battery is depleted, the BIOS parameters are reset to
their factory default settings.
Maintenance
Note:
Make sure there is a fully charged main battery in the MX3 before running the Backup
Battery Discharge Utility.
The NiCd backup battery should be discharged completely once or twice a year. The Main Battery
Pack will fully charge the backup battery. This process will allow longer life for the Backup
Battery.
The backup battery is discharged by running the Battery Discharge Utility (BBDIS81.EXE) file
(located in the Utilities subdirectory on the MX3 – see Chapter 5, “Utilities”, for further
information). The discharge utility shows the progress of the discharging. At this time, the
program can be exited while continuing the discharge process. Normal use of the MX3 can
resume during the discharge, with the exception of Hot-Swapping the Main Battery. When the
backup battery is fully discharged, the MX3 will automatically stop the discharge process and
begin to recharge the backup battery.
DO NOT REMOVE THE MAIN BATTERY PACK from the MX3 until the backup battery is
completely discharged (with BBDIS81.EXE) -- in approximately 1 hour and recharged in
approximately 2.5 hours.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Battery Hot-Swapping
51
Battery Hot-Swapping
ATTENTION Powering off the MX3 before a write (to disk) function has completed,
may result in the corruption of the flash drive.
When the main battery power level is low, the MX3 will signal the user with a continuous, onesecond beep and the MX3’s BATT M LED will be red. Beeping will continue until the battery is
replaced, the battery completely depletes, external power is applied to the MX3 using the power
jack, or the MX3 is placed in a powered cradle.
You can replace the main battery without shutting the unit off. Simply place the MX3 in Suspend
mode, remove the discharged battery and install a charged battery.
When the Main Battery is removed, the MX3 automatically transitions to the Critical Suspend
state. During Critical Suspend, the MX3’s backup battery will continue to power the unit for at
least five minutes. Though data is retained, the MX3 cannot be used until a new main battery pack
is installed. After installing the new battery, the MX3 automatically transitions to the Suspend
state. To resume from the Suspend state, press the Power key for 1 beep. Recovery from Resume
can take several seconds while the radio (if installed) is reestablishing an RF link.
If the Critical Suspend timer expires before a fully charged main battery can be inserted, the MX3
will turn off and must be rebooted after the main battery pack is installed.
Handling Batteries Safely
Never dispose of a battery in a fire. This may cause an explosion.
Do not replace individual cells in a battery pack.
Do not attempt to pry open the battery pack shell.
Be careful when handling any battery. If a battery is broken or shows signs of leakage do not
attempt to charge it. Dispose of it using proper procedures.
Caution
!
Caution
!
Nickel-based cells contain a chemical solution which burns skin, eyes, etc.
Leakage from cells is the only possible way for such exposure to occur. In this
event, rinse the affected area thoroughly with water. If the solution contacts the
eyes, get immediate medical attention.
NiCd and Li-Ion batteries are capable of delivering high currents when
accidentally shorted. Accidental shorting can occur when contact is made with
jewelry, metal surfaces, conductive tools, etc., making the objects very hot. Never
place a battery in a pocket or case with keys, coins, or other metal objects.
Battery Maintenance Publication
The LXE publication “Getting the Most from Your Batteries” is available on the LXE Manuals
CD-ROM and is a single-source guide to battery management. The document contains
information about battery recharging, conditioning, and other pertinent issues.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
52
MX3 Reference Guide
Handling Batteries Safely
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Chapter 4 System Configuration
Introduction
There are many different aspects to the setup and configuration of the MX3. Many of the setup
and configuration settings are dependent upon the optional features, such as hardware and
software, installed on the unit. The examples found in this chapter are to be used as samples only,
the configuration of your specific MX3 computer may vary. The following sections provide a
general reference for the configuration of the MX3 and some of its optional features.
Installed Software
When you order an MX3 you receive the software files required by the separate programs needed
for operation and communication. The files are loaded by LXE and stored in subdirectories in the
MX3.
This section lists the contents of the subdirectories and the general function of the files. Files
installed in each MX3 are specific to the intended function of the MX3 -- an MX3 using ANSI
Plus and TCP/IP software will have a different file structure than that of an MX3 being used for
DOS batch functions.
Files installed in each MX3 configured for an RF environment contain PCMCIA card radio
specific drivers – the drivers for each type of radio, for example 900 MHz versus 2.4 GHz, are
specific to the radios installed in the RF environment and are not interchangeable.
Drive C Internal Flash Array
The on-board Internal Flash Array (IFA) is 4MB, and it is configured as the C: drive - i.e., the
equivalent of a disk drive in a PC. One inherent difference between Flash technology and a
rotating media disk drive is the fact that it is solid-state, therefore it is much more rugged than a
rotating media would be. Another difference is that its write (but not read) time can be slower than
a rotating media.
Depending on which software configuration is ordered, the following sections list the files that
may be stored on the Flash or C drive.
ATTENTION Powering off the MX3 before a write (to disk) function has completed,
may result in the corruption of the flash drive.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
54
Installed Software
Software Loaded on Drive C
The software loaded on the MX3 computer consists of BIOS, Card and Socket Services, PCMCIA
card drivers, utilities, DOS 6.22, a protocol stack for 2.4 GHz radio support, radio drivers, and/or
a LXE terminal emulator.
The software supported by the MX3 is summarized below:
LXE Terminal Emulations
The terminal emulator resident on the MX3 determines the radio card type (900 MHz or 2.4 GHz)
installed in the MX3.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ANSI Plus 2.4 GHz Terminal Emulator
ANSI Plus 900 MHz Terminal Emulator
DOS LDS Plus 900 MHz Terminal Emulator
DOS IBM 3270 900 MHz Terminal Emulator
DOS IBM 5250 900 MHz Terminal Emulator
TN3270 2.4 GHz Terminal Emulator
TN5250 2.4 GHz Terminal Emulator
FTP Software’s PC/TCP or Datalight’s Sockets
Used for 2.4 GHz radio management.
DOS Version 6.22
DOS Version 6.22 files are loaded in the DOS subdirectory. Only those DOS files required for
optimum performance are loaded on the MX3. Not all DOS 6.22 files are available on the MX3,
but may be added to the flash disk at a later time by the system administrator.
PCMCIA
Used for PCMCIA card management. The following file types are resident in the MX3.
•
•
•
•
Socket Services
Card Services
PCMCIA SRAM MTD
PCMCIA ATA MTD
Radio Drivers
Only one radio is installed in the MX3 at any one time. The radio resident on the MX3 determines
the radio card drivers (900 MHz or 2.4 GHz) installed in the MX3.
SNMP DOS Agent
The SNMP DOS agent executable resides in the \AGENT directory for 2.4GHz installations. For
information on enabling/disabling the SNMP Agent, please refer to the “DOS Autoconfigurator
Instructions”. For details on Agent operation, please refer to the “SNMP Agent Reference
Guide”. Both manuals are available in electronic format on the LXE Manuals CD.
Avalanche
Please refer to the following section titled “Avalanche” when Avalanche is installed on the MX3.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Installed Software
55
IR Port Driver
The IrDA Lite Plus file must be loaded on each MX3 and/or PC used in the file transfer. You will
also need DOS 6.22 files PRINT.EXE and the COPY or XCOPY.EXE command files.
•
LXE IrDA Lite Plus
Signature Capture
Signature capture software is only installed/used when the MX3 has the optional touch screen
installed.
Utilities
See Chapter 5, “Utilities”.
C Root Directory
Filename
Function
AUTOEXEC.BAT
The AUTOEXEC.BAT file is not essential to the operation of the
MX3. The MX3 will boot without it. The AUTOEXEC.BAT file is a
batch file that contains a series of DOS commands. The MX3 reads the
AUTOEXEC.BAT file and executes the commands in the order in
which they appear. The information in this file may be altered and
some software applications will automatically alter it during their
installation process.
CONFIG.SYS
The CONFIG.SYS file is not essential to the operation of the MX3,
but it is essential to the operation of certain software programs. The
information in this file may be altered, some software applications will
automatically alter it during their installation process.
TERMTYPE.EXE
Identifies the computer type for SNMP agent.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
56
Installed Software
\DOS Files
Filename
Description
ANSI.SYS
Interprets ANSI escape sequences.
CHKDSK.EXE
Checks the status of a disk and displays a report. Can also fix disk
errors.
COMMAND.COM
A DOS file that runs programs, manages files, controls information
processing, directs input and output, among other functions.
FORMAT.COM
Formats a read-write disk drive (flash and RAM drives only) removing
all data.
HIMEM.SYS
Extended memory manager.
MEM.EXE
Displays the amount of used and free memory on a computer.
MODE.COM
Configures system devices.
MORE.COM
Displays 25 lines of output at a time.
NED.CFG
Configuration file for NED.EXE ASCII text editor.
NED.EXE
This program is used when editing ASCII text files.
REMDISK.EXE
Companion file to REMSERV.EXE. Each computer must use the same
baud rate and packet or non-packet-style transmission. This file runs
on one computer and REMSERV.EXE runs on the other.
REMSERV.EXE
Companion file to REMDISK.EXE. This file runs on one computer
and REMDISK.EXE runs on the other. Used for manipulating files on
two computers’ hard disks. Use a null modem cable connecting both
serial ports.
REV.BAT
Displays software revision level.
SYS.COM
Adds system files to disks.
VER
Displays the current version identity of DOS. This command is run at
the DOS prompt.
XCOPY.EXE
Copies multiple files and, optionally, subdirectories from one disk to
another.
\AGENT
The SNMP agent files are loaded on MX3’s with a 2.4GHz radio.
Please refer to the “SNMP Agent Reference Guide” and “Client Configuration
Manager” for more details on the SNMP agent. Please refer to the following section
titled “Avalanche” when Avalanche is installed on the MX3.
Filename
Description
AGENT.EXE
Diagnostic agent. Provides limited access to the LXE Private MIB.
CFGAGENT.EXE
Configuration agent. Provides full access to the LXE Private MIB.
REV.BAT
Displays current software revision level.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Installed Software
57
\IRDA Files
Filename
Function
IRPLUS.EXE
IrDA Lite Plus application. Data can be sent in both directions but not
at the same time.
\PCMCIA Files
See “PCMCIA Card Management and LXE DOS Computers”, for complete
instructions or troubleshooting when using these files.
Filename
Function
CISDUMP
Permits user to list and interpret contents of a PC Card’s Card
Information Structure (CIS) for debug use.
CNFIGNAM.EXE
Driver that specifies which PC configuration should be accessed from
the PCM.INI file. This file is added to the CONFIG.SYS file.
DPMS.EXE
Novell driver that provides memory management services.
PCM.EXE
DOS-based utility for reviewing, modifying, or creating PC Card
configurations.
Note:
May or may not be present.
PCM.INI
Stores PCMCIA configuration parameters.
PCMATA.SYS
Device driver for ATA–IDE hard disk emulation. Used with SRAM
cards, rotating disk cards, or solid-state mass storage cards. This file is
added to the CONFIG.SYS file.
PCMCS95.EXE
Card Services (driver), the operating-system–level program that
manages all PCMCIA cards. This file is added to the CONFIG.SYS
file.
PCMFDISK.EXE
Edits partition table for ATA PC Cards.
PCMRMAN.SYS
Device driver that reads Card Services resources, passes data to Card
Services which then makes device allocations. This file is added to the
CONFIG.SYS file.
PCMSCD.EXE
Device driver for FAX/Modem and LAN cards. This file is added to
the CONFIG.SYS file.
PCMSS.EXE
Socket Services (driver), the BIOS–level program that functions as the
interface between the card socket and the Card Services program.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
58
Installed Software
\UTILS
Note:
The utilities included in the following list are included with all non-terminal emulation
configurations.
Filename
Function
BBDIS81.EXE
Battery Discharge Utility. Condition the 50 mAh NiCd Backup Battery
mounted on the system board. The battery discharge starts and when
discharged switches to backup battery charge mode.
BBTST81.EXE
Backup Battery Test Utility. Indicates the current status of the backup
battery and the voltage.
BCWEDGE.EXE
Barcode Wedge utility. Interprets data from barcode scanner as
keyboard data. Does not function in Win95.
BEEP81.EXE
Beeper Utility. Changes the volume of the beeper using the up and
down arrow keys on the keypad/keyboard.
COMTST81.EXE
Communication Port Utility. To diagnose the serial communication
port, a simple loop back test routine is included in this file. The figure
showing how to build a loop back plug is included in this chapter. The
test results will read PASS or FAIL. A failure is identified and
described.
DISP81.EXE
Display Utility. Activates every pixel on the display to verify
functionality.
KEY2381.EXE
Keyboard Utility. This utility performs a contact functional test of each
key on the keyboard. When activated, the key labels appear on the
screen and then each key, when initialized, clears the key label from
the screen.
LXEF.EXE
File Transfer Utility. Transfer files using serial port or IR ports. Also
acts as agent for the Win32 Developer Toolkit Application.
PARAM81.EXE
Parameter Dump Utility. This utility collects the setup configurable
parameters and lists them in a text file.
SCU.EXE
Scanner Configuration Utility. Allows programming multiple scanners
with the same data.
SETAPI_4.EXE
Set An API Function. Runs an API call to set a mode or change a
parameter.
TSCAL.EXE
Touchscreen (Digitizer) Calibration Utility. Calibrates the touchscreen
to the display screen area.
TSTEST.EXE
Touchscreen (Digitizer) Test Utility. Verifies touchscreen calibration
when the data mode is set in compensated mode.
The following utilities are included with terminal emulation configurations.
BBDIS81.EXE
BBTST81.EXE
BCWEDGE.EXE
COMSTS81.EXE
PARAM81.EXE
SCU.EXE
SETAPI_4.EXE
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Installed Software
59
Terminal Emulation Directories
Please refer to the specific Terminal Emulation’s reference guide for complete
instructions.
Batch MX3’s do not have terminal emulation (TE) files and may or may not have a radio card.
When a need exists to convert a batch MX3 to a TE unit or a different radio card, contact LXE
Customer Services for assistance.
Note:
900 MHz radio files are loaded in the Terminal Emulation subdirectories, i.e. \APLUS,
\LDSPLUS, \IBM (for both 3270 and 5250).
The terminal emulator resident on the MX3 determines the radio card type (900 MHz or 2.4 GHz)
installed in the MX3. Following are the directory names containing the TE program files:
\APLUS
\APLUS
\LDS24
\LDSPLUS
\IBM
\IBM
\IBM24
\IBM24
Note:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
ANSI Plus with 2.4 GHz radio
ANSI Plus with 900 MHz radio
DOS LDS Plus with 2.4 GHz radio
DOS LDS Plus with 900 MHz radio
DOS IBM 3270 with 900 MHz radio
DOS IBM 5250 with 900 MHz radio
TN3270 with 2.4 GHz radio
TN5250 with 2.4 GHz radio
Dual TE’s are supported on MX3 computers with an 8 Meg. Flash drive. MX3’s with a 4
Meg. DO NOT support dual TE’s.
MX3 Reference Guide
60
Installed Software
Dual Terminal Emulation
Dual TE’s (if ordered) may be resident when the unit is used in conjunction with the LXE 6224
Session Manager, subject to the following conditions:
•
Multiple Terminal Emulators on the same client device must use the same radio type
(900MHz or 2.4GHz), and
•
Only one IBM Terminal Emulator can be installed on the same client device (3270
or TN3270 or 5250 or TN5250).
For more information on items in this section, please refer to the LXE electronic
manual titled “DOS Autoconfigurator Instructions” on the LXE Manuals CD.
TE Selection Menu
The user is presented with the TE Selection Menu listing the available terminal emulators. For
example, a user could see:
[5] Launch 5250
[A] Launch ANSIPLUS
[E] Exit to DOS
Please select option:
[5, A, E]?
Upon selecting one of the terminal emulator options, the desired TE is launched. When the user
selects E, the screen is cleared and system is returned to the DOS prompt.
In addition to multiple TE’s, the TE Selection Menu can also display multiple Autologin hosts for
some TE’s. Please refer to the applicable TE Reference Guide for more information on multiple
hosts.
Switching Terminal Emulators
2.4GHz Radios
When the user quits the TE with an ALT-X, the screen is cleared and the menu is presented again.
900MHz Radio
After exiting the active terminal emulator, the computer reboots and displays the TE Selection
Menu.
Single Terminal Emulator Present
After the initial auto-configuration, the system will boot up and immediately launch the terminal
emulator. No menu is presented.
Menu Customization
The system administrator may change almost every facet of the menu display by modifying the
variables found at the top of TESELECT.BAT. Details on modifying the TESELECT.BAT file
are included in the “DOS Autoconfigurator Instructions”.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Installed Software
61
Radio-Specific Subdirectory
\PCTCP (2.4GHz Radio Specific
Files)
The PCTCP files are included with MX3’s that have a 2.4 GHz radio installed.
Filename
Description
IPSTAT.EXE
Gives statistics on IP and memory.
LSL.COM
Link Support Layer driver.
NET.CFG
Contains radio parameters.
ODIPKT.COM
ODI Packet driver.
PDTEST.EXE
Test or diagnose the packet driver. Unavailable as of Nov 2003.
REV.BAT
Displays current software revision level.
SETHOST.EXE
Manage host names and IP addresses. Unavailable as of Nov 2003.
SOCKET.CFG
Contains options for SOCKETP.EXE
SOCKETP.EXE
Sockets TCP/IP kernel for use with packet drivers.
TCP.EXE
Manipulate or view TCP parameters and status.
XPING.EXE
Test installation with a continuous ping.
Lucent Specific
WVLAN43 (all
WVLAN44 files)
Lucent radio driver files.
DRIVER.1ST
Radio driver file.
Proxim Specific
RL2PCM.COM
Proxim radio driver file.
Symbol Specific
11ODIPC.COM
Symbol radio driver file (DS 11Mb only)
SLAINIT.EXE
Symbol radio driver files (2Mb only)
SLAODI.COM
Symbol radio driver files (2Mb only)
Cisco Specific
CSCODI
Cisco radio driver file (350 series radio only).
AWCO48C
Cisco radio driver file (340 series radio only).
WEPDOS.EXE
Set WEP key into Cisco radio.
AWCLEAP.EXE
DOS utility to sep LEAP (350 series radio only).
SETLEAP.BAT
Batch file to run AWCLEAP (350 series only).
CLEAR.BAT
Batch file to clear LEAP username and password (350 series radio
only).
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
62
Installed Software
LXE 900Mhz Radio Files
The LXE 900MHz radio files are installed in the Terminal Emulation subdirectories.
Filename
Description
LXE900SS.EXE
Spread spectrum radio driver.
LXE900SS.HEX
Modem control codes.
PCRFLIB.EXE
Interface between the radio driver and the terminal emulator.
RFPARSE.EXE
Used by PCRFLIB to obtain configuration settings.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Configuration and Sample Files
63
Configuration and Sample Files
When the MX3 is turned on, the operating system looks for several files in order to start up your
system. Two of these files are hidden system files that cannot be seen when you perform a DOS
directory command (DIR). The other files that are read at start up are:
COMMAND.COM
The COMMAND.COM file is essential to the operation of your system. Without it your system
cannot boot. It contains the programming for resident DOS commands (the commands which
allow you to change directories, copy, rename and delete files, etc.).
The COMMAND.COM file should be located in the root (C:\) directory.
CONFIG.SYS
The CONFIG.SYS file is not essential to the operation of the MX3, but it is essential to the
operation of certain software programs. The information in this file may be altered and some
software applications will automatically alter it during their installation process.
The default CONFIG.SYS file that is shipped with the MX3 varies depending on both the
software and hardware configuration of the unit.
AUTOEXEC.BAT
The AUTOEXEC.BAT file is not essential to the operation of the MX3. The MX3 will boot
without it. The AUTOEXEC.BAT file is a batch file that contains a series of commands. The
MX3 reads the AUTOEXEC.BAT file and executes the commands in the order in which they
appear. The information in this file may be altered and some software applications will
automatically alter it during their installation process.
The default AUTOEXEC.BAT file that is shipped with the MX3 varies depending on both the
software and hardware configuration of the unit.
For information on customizing the keyboard and display for international use, refer
to a commercially available “ROM-DOS User’s Manual”.
The examples provided throughout this section are for illustration purposes only.
Do not use these examples for your operation, as each computer configuration is different.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
64
Configuration and Sample Files
Sample AUTOEXEC.BAT File
For 900MHz Radio
Command
Explanation
@ECHO OFF
Do not display batch command text during AUTOEXEC.BAT
file run
Place temporary files/data here
SET TEMP=C:\TEMP
PATH=c:\dos;c:\pcmcia;c:\utils\c:\;
*/ When the computer starts up, the operating system will look
in these directories for the files it needs
prompt $p$g
C:
cd \aplus
lxe900ss
xxxxx.xxx
pcrflib
w84nsync
aplus
MX3 Reference Guide
Move DOS pointer to the C drive
Move DOS pointer to the LXE Terminal Emulation (e.g. ANSI
Plus) subdirectory
Load the radio driver
Load the keyboard driver (for ANSI Plus only)
Load the interface between the radio driver and the terminal
emulator
Run the TE interface program (e.g. ANSI Plus)
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Configuration and Sample Files
65
For 2.4GHz Radio (with ANSI Plus)
Command
Explanation
@ECHO OFF
Do not display batch command text during AUTOEXEC.BAT
file run
PATH=c:\dos;c:\pcmcia;c:\utils\c:\pctcp;c:\;
*/ When the computer starts up, the operating system will look in
these directories for the files it needs
SET TEMP=C:\TEMP
Place temporary files/data here
set sockets =c:\pctcp
c:\pctcp\lsl.com
C:\pctcp\XXXXXX
Load the 2.4GHz radio driver here:
WVLAN43 for Lucent radio
RL2PCM for Proxim radio
AWCO48C for Cisco 340radio
CSCODI for Cisco 350 radio
SLAODI for Symbol radio
c:\pctcp\odipkt.com 0 0x69
c:\pctcp\socketp.exe c:\pctcp\socket.cfg
Look in this file for TCP/IP parameters
Note: The Proxim radio requires that /m=12288 follows
socketp.exe
C:
Move DOS pointer to the C drive
cd \aplus
Move DOS pointer to the LXE Terminal Emulation (e.g. ANSI
Plus) subdirectory
xxxxx.xxx
Load the keyboard driver (for ANSI Plus loads only)
aplus
Run the TE interface program (e.g. ANSI Plus)
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
66
Configuration and Sample Files
Sample CONFIG.SYS File
Note:
Do not use these examples for your operation, as each computer configuration is
different.
Please refer to commercially available ROM-DOS User’s Guides for complete
instructions or troubleshooting when using these DOS files.
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF
FILES=45
STACKS=9,256
DOS=HIGH,UMB
LASTDRIVE=Z
Rem Card and Card Socket Services
DEVICE=C:\PCMCIA\DPMS.EXE
DEVICEHIGH=C:\PCMCIA\CNFIGNAM.EXE /DEFAULT
DEVICEHIGH=C:\PCMCIA\PCMSS.EXE
DEVICEHIGH=C:\PCMCIA\PCMCS95.EXE
DEVICEHIGH=C:\PCMCIA\PCMRMAN.SYS
DEVICEHIGH=C:\PCMCIA\PCMSCD.EXE
DEVICEHIGH=C:\PCMCIA\PCMATA.SYS
NEWFILE=C:\RADIO.SYS
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Configuration and Sample Files
67
Sample NET.CFG Files
Note:
Hex values are indicated with a leading 0x. NET.CFG values do not use the 0x.
Note:
If the device is configured to use Avalanche for network settings, manual changes made
to NET.CFG and SOCKET.CFG may be overwritten.
Lucent Radio NET.CFG File
See Chapter 6, “RF Network Configuration”, for explanations of NET.CFG
parameters.
Link Support
buffers 4 1550
Protocol ODIPKT
Bind WVLAN43
Link Driver WVLAN43
FRAME ETHERNET_II
WaveLAN_Network_Name ANY
Station_Name "station_name"
AP_Distance 1
Microwave_Robustness = N
Transmit_Rate
3
Medium_Reservation 2347
Card_Power_Management 1
Maximum_Sleep_Duration 100
Receive_All_Multicasts N
Enable_Encryption N
;
;
;
;
Key1
Key2
Key3
Key4
;>>
;
;
;
;
;
Transmit_Key_ID: integer in the range 1..4
If you enable WEP encryption, you can select one key for wireless
data transmissions from the list of WEP Encryption Key Values.
Valid range: 1-4
Default value: 1
Transmit_Key_ID
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
abcde
0x123456789a
abcdefghijkl2
0x112233445566778899AABBCCDD
MX3 Reference Guide
68
Configuration and Sample Files
Proxim Radio NET.CFG File
See Chapter 6, “RF Network Configuration”, for explanations of NET.CFG
parameters.
Link Support
BUFFERS 2 1550
Protocol ODIPKT
BIND RL2PCM
;IP address is maintained in the socket.cfg file
Link Driver RL2PCM
Socket
A
Initialize_365 N
Int
3
Mem #1
C100
Port
300
Inactivity_Min 0
Inactivity_Sec 1
Sniff_Time
0
Domain
0 ; set per customer settings
Station_Type
0
Peer_To_Peer
N
Roam_Config
1
Mac_Optimize
1
Channel
1
SubChannel
1
Frame
Ethernet_II
; Frame
Ethernet_802.2
; Frame
Ethernet_802.3
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Configuration and Sample Files
69
Cisco Radio NET.CFG File
See Chapter 6, “RF Network Configuration”, for explanations of NET.CFG
parameters.
;Configuration settings for LSL.COM (Link Support Layer)
; Buffers 4 1550
: required to avoid "Network jammed" message in
;
: Clarkson Terminal Emulator
Link Support
BUFFERS 4 1550
;Configuration for Packet Driver shim. This shim is used by
;Clarkson Terminal Emulator (CUTE) and other 3rd party protocol
;stacks.
; BIND CSCODI
: binds to the Cisco 350 driver
Protocol ODIPKT
Bind CSCODI
file handles=60
LINK DRIVER CSCODI
;Initialization file for Infrastructure operating mode
; NOTE: The following are some keyword parameters that may
;be modified. Any commented or omitted keyword parameter
;assumes the factory default. For most situations the
;factory defaults will be appropriate. In situations where
;the factory default needs to be modified, uncomment or add the
;keyword parameter line and set the appropriate keyword value.
SSID
;NodeName
"" ;Must match Access Point setting
""
;Descriptive station name
LEAP
PowerSaveMode
MaxPowerSave
;WorldMode
;ShortPreamble
"OFF"
;LEAP authentication (OFF -or- ON)
"FASTPSP"
;Power save modes (CAM, FASTPSP, PSP)
"ON"
;Maximum power save mode (OFF -or- ON)
"OFF" ;World mode (OFF -or- ON)
0
;PLCP short preamble (0=auto,1=long, 2=short)
;FragThreshold
;RTSThreshold
;DataRate1
;DataRate2
;DataRate3
;DataRate4
;RefreshInterval
2312
2312
0x02
0x04
0x0B
0x16
10000
;Packet size to start fragmenting
;Packet size to start sending RTS/CTS
;(1)
Mbps supported data bit rate
;(2)
Mbps supported data bit rate
;(5.5) Mbps supported data bit rate
;(11) Mbps supported data bit rate
;Inactivity time to check association
;To enable WEP uncomment the following line and set the
;key with the wepdos.exe utility
authtype
"open"
; Set WEP key in radio before wepopen
;
(WEPOPEN, WEPSHARED, MIXEDOPEN, MIXEDSHARED)
;The diversity parameter must be set according to the
;number of antennas for each terminal.
;setting for MX1, MX3 = on
;setting for 1380,1390,VX1,VX2,VX4 = right
;setting for 2325,MX2 = right
diversity
"on"
; for use on terminals with 2 antennas
;diversity "left"; for use on terminals with 1 antenna left port
;diversity "right"; for use on terminals with 1 antenna right port
;The adapter needs 32 16-bit I/O ports, and 1 non-sharable IRQ.
;The following lines should be uncommented and the appropriate
;values set in the following scenarios:
; 1) PCMCIA mode: Override the I/O port base and/or IRQ
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
70
Configuration and Sample Files
;
assigned by PCMCIA card services.
; 2) PCMCIA mode: PCMCIA card services is not being used.
; 3) ISA mode: Override the I/O port base and/or IRQ assigned
;
by Plug and Play.
; 4) ISA mode: Non-Plug and Play operation.
;PortBase
;IRQ
140
5
;If the PCMCIA interface is being used without PCMCIA card services,
;uncomment the following lines and set the appropriate values.
Memory
Socket
c9000
1
;If the PCMCIA interface is not being used, set the appropriate
;value of "ISA" or "PCI".
BusType
"PCMCIA"
Frame ETHERNET_II
; Frame ETHERNET_802.3
; Frame ETHERNET_802.2
protocol IPX 0 ETHERNET_II
show dots=on
Note:
MX3 Reference Guide
LEAP, WorldMode and ShortPreamble parameters are valid for Cisco 350 radios only.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Configuration and Sample Files
71
Symbol FHSS 2Mb Radio
NET.CFG File
Note:
The Symbol FHSS 2Mb radio is obsolete 2005.
See Chapter 6, “RF Network Configuration”, for explanations of NET.CFG
parameters.
IMPORTANT NOTE: commented lines must have a ; in column 1.
; Lines that are not commented out must have a space in column
; 1 and the parameter starts on column 2.
;
link support
buffers 4 1550
protocol odipkt
bind slaodi
link driver slaodi
frame ethernet_ii
ess_id
"LXE"
cardservices
socketservices
mode io
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
ioaddress 300
memory CC00
interrupt 5
tx_rate 1
tx_rate 2
socket 2
powermgmt
beacon_alg
beacon_minimum
beacon_maximum
yes
yes
; must load slainit before
; slaodi to use CS&SS
; assigned by CS&SS
yes
11
1
10
;-----------------; The following keywords are used to enable and manage the 802.11 WEP
; Encryption
;
; Auth_Type can be either Open_System or Shared_Key for the MU, the
; MAP will support both Auth_Type settings at the same time.
; The MU will only associate with APs or MAPs that support the it's
; Auth_Type. The MAP will only allow MUs to associate if the MAP
; supports the Auth_Type of the MU The default Auth_Type is
; Open_System
;
; Encrypt_Key# (where # is 1, 2, 3, or 4) will update the 1st, 2nd,
; 3rd, or 4th key encryption key in the adapter, according to the
; value of #. The parameter to these Keywords is 5 pairs of hex
; digits([0-9,a-f,A-F]) in a string.
; DO NOT prefix each pair with 0x.
; The default keys for the MU match the default keys of the UAP and
;
; MAP Encrypt_Key_ID indicates which key the adapter is to use for
; encrypting packets for transmission. The parameter is a decimal
; digit from 1 to 4.
; The default Encrypt_Key_ID is 1
; Note: The key to by used to decrypt packets being received is
; contained in the received packet.
;------------------
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
72
Configuration and Sample Files
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Auth_Type
Auth_Type
Encrypt_Key1
Encrypt_Key2
Encrypt_Key3
Encrypt_Key4
Encrypt_Key_ID
Open_System
Shared_Key
"xx xx xx xx
"xx xx xx xx
"xx xx xx xx
"xx xx xx xx
n
xx"
xx"
xx"
xx"
link driver slainit
verbose yes
DynWindowRsrcs yes
Symbol 4121 11Mb Radio
NET.CFG File
See Chapter 6, “RF Network Configuration”, for explanations of NET.CFG
parameters.
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
1. A semicolon as the first non blank character denotes a
comment line.
2. Commented out parameter lines create the default setting.
3. Rate control only works with 2 Mbps (or greater) radios
4. Encryption controls only work with 2Mbps (or greater)
radios
5. ESSID must be changed to reflect the local network.
link support
Buffers 4 1550
Protocol ODIPKT
Bind s11odi
link driver s11odi
frame ethernet_II
; frame ethernet_802.2
;
The ESS_ID can be a string of 1 to 32 case sensitive characters.
ess_id 101
station_name
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Use the following keyword to specify rates at which the Adapter
is allowed to operate. If no rates are specified, the Adapter
will use all rates available on the radio. Regardless of what is
specified, the radio will allow either 1 and 2 Mbps or all four
rates, i.e., 1, 2, 5.5, and 11 Mbps.
Tx_Rate 1 (1 Mbps)
Tx_Rate 2 (2 Mbps)
Tx_Rate 5 (5.5 Mbps)
Tx_Rate 11 (11 Mbps)
Tx_Rate
Tx_Rate
Tx_Rate
Tx_Rate
;
1
2
5
11
Note: IO Mode is required if using Card/Socket Services
Mode IO
IOAddress 340
Memory CC000
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Configuration and Sample Files
73
Interrupt 5
; Set performance index to "1" for MX3. 0=CAM , 1=Power Management On
performance_index 1
; Set diversity to "Both" for two antennas and "A" for one antenna.
diversity BOTH
;
;
;
;
;
;
To enable WEP you must set Encrypt_Enable_Index to the number of the
Encrypt_Key# to use and then set the encryption key to the same
value as the AP is set for. Zero means No Encryption and is the
default.
For 128 bit encryption keys you must have 13 pairs of hex digits and
5 pairs of hex digits for 40 bit encryption.
;
;
;
;
;
Encrypt_Enable_Index 0
Encrypt_Key1 12 34 56 78
Encrypt_Key2 12 34 12 34
Encrypt_Key3 AB CD EF 12
Encrypt_Key4 12 34 56 78
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
90
12
34
12
12
34
56
34
34
12
78
56
56
34
90
78
78
12
AB
12
90
34
CD
34
12
12
EF
56
34
34
12
78
56
12
34
12
MX3 Reference Guide
74
Configuration and Sample Files
Sample SOCKET.CFG File
See Chapter 6, “RF Network Configuration”, for explanations of SOCKET.CFG
parameters.
Note:
The values for some parameters are dependent on the type of radio card installed.
Please refer to Chapter 6, “RF Network Configuration” for appropriate values for a
specific radio card.
Note:
If the device is configured to use Avalanche for network settings, manual changes made
to NET.CFG and SOCKET.CFG may be overwritten.
#
#
#
#
#
Socket.cfg sets the options for Data Light socketp.exe
The section xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is for this machines IP
The net mask is specified as part of the ip address.
In the ip address command an optional /net_bits can be
used to indicate the number of bits in the network ID.
#
#
#
#
Net Bits Net Mask
8
255.0.0.0
16
255.255.0.0
24
255.255.255.0
Class
A
B
C
IP address range
0.x.x.x to 127.x.x.x
128.x.x.x to 191.x.x.x
192.x.x.x or higher
# The network can be subdivided by two for every net bit added.
#
#
#
#
#
Net Bits
1
2
3
4
Net Mask Net Bits
128
5
248
192
6
252
224
7
254
240
8
255
Net Mask
# To enable DHCP set the IP address to 0.0.0.1
IP address 0.0.0.1/16
#
#
#
#
The ARP INIT parameter makes this stack the same as
before. The stack will not send a DHCP ARP (DEFAULT) when
booting up. For added IP address checking you may comment
this line out if you are NOT using proxy ARP.
ARP INIT GRAT
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Interface sets the physicalinterfaces
pdr=packet driver
if0=interface_card
dix=frame type
1500=MTU
10=Buffers
0x69=ioaddr
Interface pdr if0 dix 1500 10 0x69
# When using a gateway (IP router) to the rest of the world,
# replace "XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" with your gateway ip and
# remove the # at the beginning of the line.
# route add default if0 XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
#
#
#
#
When using a domain name server (DNS),
replace XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX with the IP address of the DNS,
and remove the # at the beginning
of the line
# domain server XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Configuration and Sample Files
# domain suffix
75
# example lxe.com
# Redisplay IP information
IP address
# options, refer to documentation to change
ip ttl 15
tcp mss 1360
tcp window 2920
tcp retry 8
tcp irtt 500ms
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
76
Avalanche
Avalanche
Note:
Wavelink Avalanche is not designed to run on a device with a 900MHz or Narrowband
radio.
Avalanche may or may not be installed on your mobile device. Refer to this section for important
information relating to Avalanche running on an MX3. Contact your LXE representative if
Avalanche is needed and your mobile system has not been upgraded to the required minimum
software baseline revision levels. For complete instruction when using Avalanche please refer to
the “LXE Computers and Wavelink Avalanche User’s Guide” on the LXE Manuals CD.
Minimum Software Baseline
The minimum software revision level (baseline) must be loaded on the mobile device in order to
use Avalanche:
Operating System............................486DGSYS.02A
LXE Agent......................................AGNTGD00.01C
Util ..................................................MX3GUTIL.01B
Core.................................................486DGCOR.01A
Avalanche Number .........................AVA1GD01.01A
Cisco 350 Radio Driver ..................C802GD35.01H
Lucent Radio Driver .......................L802GD01.01P
Symbol 4121 Radio Driver .............S802GD21.01E
Upgrading the MX3
If an LXE computer does not meet the minimum baselines specified above, it must be manually
upgraded to the baseline before it can be used with Avalanche. The older G-Number software
should be manually deleted from the LXE computer before the new G-Number is installed.
!
MX3 Reference Guide
Copying the new G-Number software to the LXE computer without first deleting the
old G-Number software may lead to insufficient disk space on the LXE computer.
This is especially important for LXE Agent, Radio and Core G-Numbers.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Avalanche
77
Directory Structure
The information in this section supplements the information presented earlier in this chapter in
section titled “Installed Software”.
Software loaded on drive C:
\AGENT
Location of SNMP agent *
\APPS
Location of files to track software revision levels
\AVA
Location of files to support Avalanche
\DOS
Location of ROM DOS *
\PCMCIA
Location of PCMCIA files *
\PCTCP
Location of radio configuration files *
\UTILS
Location of LXE installed utilities *
\APLUS
Location of optional TE files *
\IBM24
Location of optional TE files *
\LDS24
Location of optional TE files *
*
Although Avalanche can be used to update the files contained in these directories,
the file structure is not changed by the addition of the Avalanche enablers.
\AGENT
When Avalanche enablers are installed, only the SNMP agent, AGENT.EXE is installed. The
configuration agent, CFGAGENT.EXE is not installed.
\AVA
This directory contains the Avalanche enablers and supporting files. Users must not make changes
to the contents of this directory.
When an updated enabler is loaded, it does not change the contents of the \AVA directory. The
updated enabler files are located in \APPS\AVAF. The boot process checks for a newer version of
the enabler before loading the enabler in the \AVA directory.
\APPS
This directory is used by Avalanche to track the revisions of software on the LXE DOS computer.
\APPS\AVAF
This directory is used to load updated versions of the enabler. If an updated enabler is located in
this directory, it is loaded instead of the original enabler in \AVA.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
78
BIOS Setup
BIOS Setup
Be very careful when using this utility to modify BIOS Setup parameters. The MX3 may
generate unexpected results when incorrect or conflicting parameter values are entered. The
parameters should only be modified by Information Services personnel or the system
administrator.
Note:
Make sure there is a fully charged battery in the MX3 before accessing BIOS Setup.
Accessing the BIOS Setup
When you turn the MX3 on the unit will start to boot programs from the Internal Flash Array
(IFA). If the Main Menu Setup Msg parameter is toggled On, watch the bootup sequence and
when the following is displayed:
Press F2 to Enter Setup
Press the [F2] key. When the Main Menu Setup Msg parameter is toggled Off (default), the [F2]
key is still available during the bootup sequence. The next screen displayed is the BIOS Setup
Main Menu.
BIOS Setup has three menus: Main, Advanced and Exit.
Using the Keypad
The set of keypad commands used to select menu items and parameters, as well as modify
parameter values is as follows:
Action
Keypress
Exit a menu
Esc
Activate Help Screen
F1
Modify parameter value
Space key or alpha-numeric key
Move to next parameter
Enter or Arrow Key
Move from menu to menu
Arrow key
Note:
MX3 Reference Guide
Refer to Appendix A, “Key Maps”, for other key press sequences.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
BIOS Setup
79
BIOS Setup Default Values by Option
Menu Option
Menu / Section
Default Value
Boot
Caps
COM1 Pin 9
COM2 Pin9
CPU
CtlAltDel
Date
Disp. BL
Disp. BL
Display
Docked PM
Font
Left Scan
NumLock
Off Timer
POST Msg
Power Key
Power Mgt
Right Scan
Rpt Delay
Rpt Rate
Setup Msg
Summary
Suspend
Time
Touch Wake
Main
Advanced / Keyboard
Advanced / Other
Advanced / Other
Advanced / Power Mgt
Advanced / Keyboard
Main
Advanced / Power Mgt
Advanced / Power Mgt
Advanced / Power Mgt
Advanced / Power Mgt
Advanced / Other
Advanced / Power Mgt
Advanced / Keyboard
Advanced / Power Mgt
Main
Advanced / Power Mgt
Advanced / Power Mgt
Advanced / Power Mgt
Advanced / Keyboard
Advanced / Keyboard
Main
Main
Advanced / Power Mgt
Main
Advanced / Power Mgt
A: then C:
Off
RI
RI
Aggressive
Reboot
09/02/1988
Timed
3s
15 s
Off
8x16
Numeric Enter
On
5m
Off
Susp-Off
On
Scan
0.5 s
10 /s
Off
Off
5m
00:00:00
On
Settings are saved temporarily as each parameter activity screen is closed. Changes are saved to
CMOS RAM when Exit With Save is selected and the BIOS setup program closes.
Changed parameter values will take effect when the MX3 reboots upon exiting BIOS Setup. If the
MX3 does not automatically reboot upon exit, please reboot the MX3.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
80
BIOS Setup
Main Menu Options
To edit parameters, use the up and down arrow key to move from parameter to parameter.
Use the space key or an alpha-numeric key to modify a parameter value.
Press F1 to activate the help screen then use the panning function to move around the help screen.
Press ESC to close the help screen.
Use the left and right arrow keys to move from menu to menu.
Press the ESC key or key sequence to go directly to the Exit Menu.
Main Menu Parameters
When changes have been made, press an arrow key to go to another parameter or menu or press
ESC to go to the Exit Menu.
Menu Option
Default Value
Time
Date
Boot
Setup Msg
POST Msg
Summary
00:00:00
01/04/2000
C: then A:
Off
Off
Off
Parameter Changes
Settings are saved temporarily as each parameter activity screen is closed. Changes are saved to
CMOS RAM when “Save and Exit” is selected and the BIOS Setup program closes.
Changed and saved parameter values take effect after the MX3 is rebooted.
Time
Specifies the current system time.
This parameter is shown in the following format:
hh:mm:ss
where:
hh is hours
mm is minutes
ss is seconds.
Each of these fields is selected and modified separately. When the parameter is highlighted, type
the desired numeric entry and then press the <Tab> key to move from hours to minutes to
seconds. The system time is set according to the standard 24-hour clock.
Default:
MX3 Reference Guide
00:00:00
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
BIOS Setup
81
Date
Specifies the current system date.
This parameter is shown in the following format:
month/day/year
Each of these fields is selected and modified separately. When the parameter is highlighted, type
the desired numeric entry and then press the <Tab> key to move from month to day to year. The
backslashes are automatically added by the system. When daylight savings occurs, the system date
is not automatically changed.
Default:
9/2/1999
Boot
This option is used to define how the system treats drive A: when booting. Booting can occur
from A drive or directly from the C drive (Flash drive). To reduce the amount of time required to
boot, the boot sequence should be set to “C: only”.
Values:
A: then C:
C:
Default:
Note:
Boot from the A drive, or if no
media is present in the A drive,
boot from the C drive.
Boot from the C drive
searching for an A drive.
without
A: then C:
The A: drive is read only when an SRAM card is inserted. The MX3 does not recognize a
radio card as an SRAM card. When there is no SRAM card installed, drive A: is ignored.
Setup Msg
Use this option to allow or disallow the display of the message “Press F2 to enter Setup” upon
initial bootup or reboot. When the parameter is set to Off, the message is not displayed to the user
although the F2 key can still be pressed at the appropriate time to enter the Setup Menu.
Values:
On, Off
Default:
Off
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
82
BIOS Setup
Post Msg
Set this parameter to On to stop the boot process if the Power On Self Test (POST) procedure
encounters errors. Otherwise, the system continues to attempt to boot despite many startup error
messages that display.
See Chapter 7, “Troubleshooting”, for more information on POST messages.
Values:
On, Off
Default:
Off
A parameter setting of On only affects the following error conditions (messages are displayed)
and the bootup is halted:
Messages that Halt Bootup
•
IDE Unit Error
No media connected
Configured for 0 cylinders
Controller reset failed
Media not ready
Track 0 seek timed out
Media initialization failed
Media recalibration failed
Last track seek failed
•
Timer Error
System timer (0) failed
•
Disk Error for Debug
Floppy type does not match setup only for debug capabilities
•
I/O Chip Error
I/O conflicts exist for serial ports, parallel ports, and IDE units (any or all)
•
Other Error
IRQ conflict, unsupported COM port configuration, keyboard locked
Bootup Continues after These Messages
This option does not affect the following error conditions (messages are displayed and
the bootup continues):
MX3 Reference Guide
•
Keyboard Error
Keyboard reset failed
Keyboard interrupts failed
•
CMOS Error
CMOS checksum failed
CMOS time and date not set
Real time clock failure
•
Configuration Error
Previous POST execution was incomplete
•
Scanner Error
Scanner detected, but attempts to read scanner configuration failed.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
BIOS Setup
83
Summary
This option is used to enable or disable a summary of the system configuration which displays
before the operating system starts to load. To speed up booting, this parameter can be set to Off.
Values:
On, Off
Default:
Off
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
84
BIOS Setup
Advanced Menu Options
The Advanced Menu contains several sections – Power Management, Keyboard and Other. To
view all sections, press the down arrow key instead of using the Pan Down command.
See the section titled “Panning Function” earlier in this chapter. Panning commands are used to
view a 25 row by 80 column virtual screen display using specific keypresses.
To edit parameters, use the up and down arrow key to move from parameter to parameter.
Use the space key or an alpha-numeric key to modify a parameter value.
Press F1 to activate the help screen then use the panning function to move around the help screen.
Press ESC to close the help screen.
Use the left and right arrow keys to move from menu to menu.
Press the ESC key or key sequence to go directly to the Exit Menu.
Parameter List
Menu Section
Option
Default Value
Power Mgt
Power Mgt
Left Scan
Right Scan
CPU
Disp BL
Disp BL
Display
Suspend
Off Timer
Docked PM
Touch Wake
Power Key
Caps
NumLock
Rpt Delay
Rpt Rate
CtlAltDel
Font
COM1 Pin9
COM2 Pin 9
On
Numeric Keypad Enter
Scan
Aggressive (1 s)
Timed
3s
15 s
5m
5m
Off
On
Susp-Off
Off
On
0.5s
10 s
Reboot
8x16
RI
RI
Keyboard
Other
Settings are saved temporarily as each parameter activity screen is closed. Changes are saved to
CMOS RAM when “Save and Exit” is selected and the BIOS Setup program closes.
Changed and saved parameter values take effect after the MX3 is rebooted.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
BIOS Setup
85
Power Management
When changes have been made, press an arrow key to go to another parameter or menu or press
ESC to go to the Exit Menu.
Power Mgt
This parameter must be set to On before timer options can be activated. When Power Management
is Off, the CPU setting is Full Speed.
Note:
Critical Suspend. The Off Timer is ignored when Power Management is disabled -- the
MX3 will skip critical suspend mode (running on backup battery) and turn off
immediately. It will not use any backup battery power and currently unsaved information
will be lost.
Values:
On, Off
Default:
On
CPU and Suspend Timers and RF Communication
When using an MX3 with a 2.4GHz radio driver (see previous section titled “\PCTCP Files”), the
CPU and Suspend timers can be affected by the radio.
The 2.4 radio has a time-out setting. This time-out setting is in the radio config file under
inactivity time. This time, by default, is 5 seconds and is the lowest possible value. During this 5
seconds, the radio is polled which is detected by the MX3 BIOS as “activity”. As a result, the
MX3’s Power Management keeps resetting the CPU and Suspend timers.
Left Scan
Use this parameter to reprogram the button to the left of the display.
The factory setting for the left button is Numeric Keypad Enter.
Once reprogrammed and the BIOS change saved, the button will keep the setting over cold boots.
Values:
Scan, Num Enter
Default:
Num Enter
Endcap
Possible Left Button Configurations
Blank
Numeric keypad Enter
Scanner/serial
Numeric keypad Enter
Serial/Serial
Numeric keypad Enter
TN5250/5250 Terminal Emulation only:
Blank
Field Exit w/ FLD EXIT label
Scanner/Serial
Field Exit w/ FLD EXIT label
Serial/Serial
Field Exit w/ FLD EXIT label
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
86
BIOS Setup
Right Scan
Use this parameter to reprogram the button to the right of the display.
The factory setting for the right button is Scan.
Once reprogrammed and the BIOS change saved, the button will keep the setting over cold boots.
Values:
Scan, Num Enter
Default:
Scan
Endcap
Possible Right Button 3 Configurations
Blank
Numeric keypad Enter
Scanner/serial
Scan
Serial/Serial
Numeric keypad Enter
TN5250/5250 Terminal Emulation only:
Blank
Numeric keypad Enter
Scanner/Serial
Scan
Serial/Serial
Numeric keypad Enter
CPU
Note:
Pwr Mgt Modes - Power Mgt must be set to On before the value in CPU has any effect
on the MX3.
The CPU setting determines how Power Management values control the CPU.
Aggressive setting maximizes battery life.
Moderate will balance battery life and performance.
Light will maximize performance.
Full Speed disables power management of the CPU only.
Custom setting is used to set the CPU timer in 1 second increments.
Values:
Default:
Aggressive (1 second)
Moderate (5 seconds)
Light (15 seconds)
Full Speed
Custom (user configurable
range = 1 - 63 seconds)
in
1
second
increments;
Aggressive (1 second)
Custom Setting
CPU Custom Setting is user configurable in 1 second increments up to 63 seconds. After selecting
Custom, press the down arrow to move the highlight to the seconds setting. Use the numeric keys
to enter number of seconds. Higher second values will adversely affect battery life.
3
Regardless of the type of endcap installed, the default value of the Right Button is always Scan.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
BIOS Setup
87
Disp BL
The DispBL parameter is used to set which of three modes the Display Backlight will be in.
Off - the most battery-efficient way to operate the display.
On - provides full time backlighting whenever the unit is on.
Timed - provides backlighting for a predetermined amount of time from the last key input or
display update. Set the time with the Disp BL timer parameter.
Values:
On, Off, Timed
Default:
Timed
Note:
When the Timed option is selected, use the Disp BL time parameter to set the amount of
time the display backlight remains on. If the Disp BL timer is set to a period of time
longer than the Display Timer, the backlight will be forced off when the display turns off.
Disp BL
The Disp BL timer works in conjunction with the parameter setting of Pwr Mgt Modes - Disp BL.
The display backlight timer is reset every time the following occurs: video write, touch (on a
touch screen), or any keypress.
Values:
1 - 63 seconds (in 1 second increments)
Default:
3 seconds
Note:
If Pwr Mgt Modes - Disp BL setting is not “Timed” this setting is ignored.
Display
The Display parameter designates, in seconds, how long the MX3 senses inactivity on the MX3
before shutting down. The display timer is reset every time the following occurs: video write,
touch (on a touch screen), or any keypress.
When the display timer expires and the display turns off, the Status LED turns steady green.
When the display is off, the MX3 is still powered on. Trigger presses will initiate activity.
Communications through the radio or serial ports will still continue. However, the keypad clears
all sticky key modes and LEDs and a key press functions only as a wakeup event (does not send
to the operating system or application).
Press any key once to wake the display.
Values:
0 - 63 seconds (in 1 second increments)
Default:
15 seconds
A value of 0 means Full On.
Note:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
If the Disp BL timer is set to a period of time longer than Display, the display backlight
will be forced off when the display turns off.
MX3 Reference Guide
88
BIOS Setup
Suspend
This parameter establishes how long the MX3 senses inactivity on the system before entering
Suspend Mode. This option is used to conserve battery life.
Pressing the Power key once also places the MX3 in Suspend Mode. Once in the Suspend state,
the Status LED blinks green.
Use the Power key to wake the MX3 from suspend mode or a touch on an installed touch screen.
The Suspend Timer is reset every time one of the following occurs:
Video write
Keypress
Disk / IFA Access
Touch screen touch-up
COM 1 or COM 2 access
PCMCIA Slot 0 IRQ, Slot 1 IRQ and Controller IRQ
Note:
Disabling the Suspend timer does not disable the Off Timer.
Values:
0 - 63 minutes (in 1 minute increments)
Default:
5 Min
A value of 0 means “Disabled”.
Note:
MX3 Reference Guide
Suspend can be disabled when the MX3 is to be in a cradle. See the Docked PM
parameter.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
BIOS Setup
89
Off Timer
Note:
When the Off Timer parameter is set to 0, the MX3 will skip Critical Suspend mode and
turn off immediately. It will not use backup battery power. The currently unsaved
information is lost.
Off Timer designates, in minutes, how long the MX3 waits in critical suspend mode before
shutting down.
The Off Timer begins its countdown when the MX3 is in the critical suspend state. Critical
suspend state is initiated when there is a Main Battery Power Fail caused by the inserted battery
pack failing or the main battery being removed from the MX3. The Off Timer begins the
countdown as soon as power draw is transferred from the Main Battery pack to the Backup
battery.
Note:
A fully charged Backup battery can keep the MX3 in the critical suspend state for at least
5 minutes.
Values:
0 - 63 minutes (in 1 minute increments)
Default:
5 minutes
The backup battery will continue to operate the MX3, in very low power mode, for the number of
minutes set in the Off Timer parameter.
When the MX3 is in critical suspend mode the main battery LED illuminates, all peripherals shut
down, the CPU clock is stopped, power is removed from the PCMCIA cards, and the Status LED
is blinking red.
The MX3 is saving the state prior to the main battery failing and cannot be used.
•
If a fully charged main battery pack is installed before the Off Timer time expires the
MX3 will transition to Suspend. Exiting from Suspend allows the MX3 to resume
operation where it left off – install the new battery pack.
•
If the Off Timer expires the MX3 will turn itself off and all unsaved information is lost.
Insert a fully charged battery pack and press the Power button to turn the MX3 back on.
•
When the Off Timer parameter is set to 0, the MX3 skips the critical suspend state and
turns off immediately – it will not use backup battery power. The currently unsaved
information is lost.
•
When the main battery pack is removed and the MX3 completely drains the backup
battery, the MX3’s date and time settings are lost but all other parameters are recovered.
When a fully charged battery pack is again inserted in the MX3, the backup battery will
recharge itself using the power in the battery pack. The main battery life during the
recharge session is lessened.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
90
BIOS Setup
Docked PM
Use the Docked PM parameter to set the power management preferences for the MX3 when it is
in a powered cradle.
Selecting Lights Off will turn off the display and keypad backlights.
Selecting Unchanged maintains the current power management settings.
Selecting Off disables power management settings when the MX3 is in a powered cradle.
Values:
Off
Unchanged
Lights Off
Default:
Off
Touch Wake
This parameter is used to determine whether the MX3 recovers from Suspend mode when the
screen is touched. The MX3 must have a touch screen installed and active.
See also Suspend.
Values:
On, Off
Default:
On
Power Key
Use this option to determine how the Power key will function when pressed.
When Disabled is selected and the user presses the Power key, nothing happens. The user will not
be able to place the unit in Suspend with the Power key or turn the unit off.
Note:
When the Power key is disabled, the MX3 will power off only when both the Main and
Backup batteries are depleted.
When Suspend is selected, the MX3 will enter Suspend state upon a Power key press.
When No Susp is selected and the user presses the Power key, nothing will happen unless the user
holds the key down for 4 beeps. In other words, the user cannot suspend the MX3. The user can
only turn the MX3 off.
When Suspend-Off is selected, the user can both suspend and power off the MX3. If the user holds
the Power key down for less than 4 beeps, the MX3 will transition to the Suspend state. If the user
holds the Power key down for 4 beeps, the MX3 will power off.
Values:
Disabled
Suspend
No Susp
Suspend-Off
Default:
Susp-Off
Note:
MX3 Reference Guide
Before leaving this screen, make sure the Power Key status is correct.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
BIOS Setup
91
Troubleshooting
The MX3 will not turn off -- force the MX3 to power off by holding the Power key down for 15
seconds -- the MX3 will power off. Locate and correct the problem before powering the MX3
back on – e.g. IRQ conflict, very low battery power, radio conflict, unexpected software
application result, etc.
Keyboard
When changes have been made, press an arrow key to go to another parameter or menu or press
ESC to go to the Exit Menu.
Caps
This parameter is used to determine whether the CAPS function is turned on or off at bootup.
Values:
On, Off
Default:
Off
NumLock
Use this option to set NumLock at boot time. When NumLock is On, the keypad is locked in
numeric mode. When NumLock is Off the numeric keys are inoperable.
Whether NumLock at Boot is Off or On, no LED is illuminated on the MX3.
Values:
On, Off
Default:
On
Rpt Delay
The Rpt Delay parameter will designate the period of time from the depression of a key until the
key repeats.
Values:
0.25 to 2.00 second
(0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.00, 1.25, 1.50, 1.75, 2.00)
Default: 0.5 seconds
Rpt Rate
The Rpt Rate parameter sets the number of times a keystroke will be repeated, per second, as the
key is depressed.
Values:
2 to 30 chars per second
(2, 6, 10, 15, 20, 30)
Default:
10 chars per second
CtlAltDel
This parameter determines whether the user can restart the MX3 by pressing the reboot key
sequence: CTRL+ALT+2nd + DOT.
When this parameter is No Reboot, the reboot key sequence will have no effect.
Values:
Reboot, No Reboot
Default:
Reboot
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
92
BIOS Setup
Other
When changes have been made, press an arrow key to go to another parameter or menu or press
ESC to go to the Exit Menu.
Font
The Font parameter selects the screen display font size.
Note:
This font size choice may be overridden by an application.
Values:
8x8
8x16
Default:
8x16
COM1 Pin9
This option is used to configure the endcap COM 1 serial port.
Values:
RI (Ring Indicator)
5V
Default:
RI
The MX3 has two serial ports available in three configurations.
In the first configuration, both COM1 and COM2 are connected to individual D-9 connectors on
the endcap.
In addition, COM2 is software switchable between the D-9 serial port and the internal IR port
located on the back of the unit.
In the third configuration, COM1 is connected to an internal SE923 scanner and COM2 is
software switchable between the D-9 connector on the endcap and the internal IR port on the back
of the unit.
Power to the COM ports may be turned off using a terminal emulation configuration utility.
COM2 Pin9
This option is used to configure the endcap COM 2 serial port.
Values:
RI (Ring Indicator)
5V
Default:
RI
The MX3 has two serial ports available in three configurations.
In the first configuration, both COM1 and COM2 are connected to individual D-9 connectors on
the endcap.
In addition, COM2 is software switchable between the D-9 serial port and the internal IR port
located on the back of the unit.
In the third configuration, COM1 is connected to an internal SE923 scanner and COM2 is
software switchable between the D-9 connector on the endcap and the internal IR port on the back
of the unit.
Power to the COM ports may be turned off using a terminal emulation configuration utility.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
BIOS Setup
93
Exit Menu Options
To edit parameters, use the up and down arrow key to move from parameter to parameter.
Press F1 to activate the help screen then use the panning function to move around the help screen.
Press ESC to close the help screen.
Use the left and right arrow keys to move from menu to menu.
Press the ESC key or key sequence to go directly to the Exit Menu.
As changes are made to Setup values and the values saved, the next time the MX3 is turned on or
rebooted, those saved values will be in effect.
Save and Exit
Use this option to immediately save current Setup settings to CMOS RAM and into the Flash Boot
Device (FBD).
When “Save and Exit” is highlighted, press <Enter> to save. When the saving process is
complete, press <Enter> again to exit and reboot with the current values.
Exit w/o Save
Use this option when any current changes made to Setup parameters are to be ignored. The
parameters revert to their state when Setup was entered.
When this option is highlighted, press <Enter> and the boot process continues. The system
reboots with unchanged values.
Load Defaults
This option is used to reset the Setup values to the original, default values that were set at the
factory, before suppliers or end users made changes.
As changes are made to Setup values and the values saved, the next time the MX3 is turned on or
rebooted, those saved values will be in effect.
Save this change by selecting “Save and Exit”.
Load Previous
Use this option to immediately restore CMOS RAM and update the current Setup settings from
the Flash Boot Device.
Save this change by selecting “Save and Exit”.
Save Changes
Used to save BIOS Setup changes without rebooting. The changed parameters will be in effect the
next time the MX3 is powered on or rebooted.
Reboot by selecting either “Exit w/o Save” or “Save and Exit”.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
94
API Calls
API Calls
See Also:
LXE DOS API Programming Guide
The LXE DOS Computer Application Programmer’s Interface (API) is designed to enable
application programmers to access the functionality of the computer hardware without requiring
them to understand the details of the hardware design.
The LXE MX3 Mobile Computer is architecturally an AT Clone with power management features
required for mobile use. Like all AT computers, it uses a BIOS software layer to provide a
hardware programming interface to both DOS and the Application Programs. It is functionally a
486 mobile AT customized for data collection applications. Both BIOS and DOS are available for
programming ease, but applications must be customized to make use of the enhanced features as
well as to operate with the reduced function LCD and keypad. The MX3 is not designed to be a
general-purpose computer.
API services are accessed through software interrupts 10h and 15h. The 486 API is the
application-level and driver-level software interface for all of the unique MX1 hardware.
A simple register-based procedure parameter passing architecture has been implemented with a
similar structure used by IBM BIOS. All procedural calls to the 486 API microcode is to be done
via a software interrupt.
Sample Code for API Calls
The following is a brief code segment that enables the scanner on the combination Scanner/RS232 endcap, demonstrating the proper use of API calls:
#include <stdio.h>
#include <dos.h>
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
PROT_INT
PROT_EXT
SCAN_CONTROL
COM1_MODE
SCANNER
RS_232
union REGS
0x15
0xba
0x56
0x41
0x00
0x01
inRegs, retRegs
main(){
inRegs.h.ah=PROT_EXT;
inRegs.h.al=SCAN_CONTROL;
inRegs.h.bh=COM1_MODE;
inRegs.h.bl=SCANNER;
int86(PROT_INT, &inRegs, &retRegs);
}
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Chapter 5 Utilities
Introduction
Note:
Make sure there is a fully charged battery in the MX3 before beginning a process
described in this chapter. When using an MX3 in a powered cradle or with an external
power source connected through the MX3 power jack, make sure there is an
uninterrupted power source during file transfer or process.
ATTENTION
Powering off the MX3 before a write (to disk) function has completed
may result in corruption of the flash drive.
This chapter contains descriptions and instructions for the following MX3 resident utilities:
IrDALite Plus
A standard DOS device driver (IRPLUS.EXE) which converts data sent to the MX3 COM ports to
infrared data that is then sent to an external device through the infrared port on the MX3. This
protocol sends data in both directions, but not simultaneously. Please refer to the “MX3 Cradle
Reference Guide” when using IrDALite Plus on an MX3 in a powered cradle.
LXE BCWEDGE
This Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR) program is used to redirect input from COM1 or COM2
to the BIOS key ring buffer. With this TSR running, input from a communication port appears as
if it was typed in from the keyboard.
This utility is most useful with applications that do not know about the MX3’s scanner port. This
utility, therefore, allows an off-the-shelf application to accept barcode data.
LXE Diagnostics
Use the utility programs to verify, test and program the MX3:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
COM Port Utility
Keyboard Utility
Display Utility
File Transfer Utility
Scanner Config Utility
Beeper Utility
Battery Discharge Utility
Backup Battery Test Utility
Parameter Auto-Detection Utility
Touchscreen Calibration
Touchscreen Test
Set an API Function
MX3 Reference Guide
96
Introduction
DOS Extensions
The following utilities are included with terminal emulation configurations.
BBDIS81.EXE
BBTST81.EXE
BCWEDGE.EXE
COMSTS81.EXE
PARAM81.EXE
SCU.EXE
SETAPI_4.EXE
All utilities are included in non-TE configurations.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
IrDA Lite Plus
97
IrDA Lite Plus
Note:
IrDA Lite Plus is not compatible with LXE's terminal emulation programs.
IrDA Lite Plus (IRPLUS.EXE) is a DOS device driver that complies with the standard produced
by InfraRed Data Associates for infrared communications.
The IrDA Lite Plus device driver was developed for the LXE MX3 computer. It is a standard
DOS device driver which converts data sent to the LPT/PRN, and COM1 and COM2 ports via the
BIOS, DOS, and a proprietary application interface to infrared data that is transmitted using the
infrared port on the mobile computer. Even though this device driver was developed for the MX3,
it works on a regular PC with an installed infrared port or an attached serial to infrared converter
cable (commercially available).
Note:
The MX3’s IR Port is COM2 regardless of the endcap installed on the MX3.
On the back of the MX3 Computer is the InfraRed (IR) Data Port. The IR Port is designed to
provide a data link between the MX3 and a similarly equipped piece of equipment such as a
printer.
The IR operating envelope has a distance range of 2 cm (.79 inches) to 1 meter (3.2 feet) with a
viewing angle of 30 degrees.
Operation of the IR Port is application dependent so a description of implementation varies from
application to application.
System Setup
When preparing to use IrDA Lite Plus, a command line must be added to the CONFIG.SYS file in
the MX3. See the “Quick Start” section that follows.
The IrDA Lite Plus file must be loaded on each MX3 and/or PC used in the file transfer.
When using a PC that does not have an installed IR port, a commercially available serial to
infrared adapter is required for IR file transfer to/from the MX3.
IR Communication Reliability
Transmitted data is reflected into the receiver and the software programmer needs to make sure
the data is cleared before the IR port starts its receive routines.
When the MX3 is transmitting data to the PC, it starts to fill up its Tx FIFO buffer (First In First
Out). During transmission, any reflections or light disturbances from the IR medium are going to
get interpreted as data and is clocked into the Rx FIFO buffer. Unless software developers take
preventative steps, when it goes to access the Rx FIFO buffer to determine if an ACK was
received, it may find data and “thinks” it did not receive an ACK because it contains corrupted
data due to the reflections or disturbances coming in from the IR medium. Software must be able
to handle these types of reflections or disturbances at any time during transmit or receive when
using IR communications on the MX3. If the receive algorithm requires that a specific character
be present in a specific sequence, extra precautions/steps must be taken to properly manipulate the
receive sections of the system. For example, if the software expects the first character received
after a transmission to be an “ACK”, the software design must be such that the receive buffers and
shift registers are cleared first of any other characters before getting the “ACK”.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
98
IrDA Lite Plus
IrDA Lite Plus and MX3
This configuration supports all features of the IrDA Lite Plus device driver. The driver provides
conversion from serial and printer I/O to infrared transmission packets. Applications using
extended BIOS interfaces to the serial and print devices can be utilized in these operations. The
MX3 with the IrDA Lite Plus driver installed can transmit and receive data to and from other
infrared capable devices.
For example, the MX3’s flash 4 memory can be updated by transferring files from an IrDAcompliant PC to the MX3. Until IrDA Lite Plus, SRAM cards (edited using a PC and inserted in
the target MX3) were the most common means of updating the MX3’s files and/or Flash.
Note:
The IrDA Lite Plus file must be loaded on each MX3 and/or PC used in the file transfer.
You will also need DOS utility files PRINT.EXE and the COPY (or XCOPY.EXE)
command file.
Note:
IrDA Lite Plus is compatible with a standard PC. When using a PC without an installed
IR port, a commercially available serial to infrared adapter is required for file transfer
to/from the MX3.
Note:
See section titled “IRSEND and IRECV Files” for add-in Borland C/C++ programs.
IRSEND.C, after compiling, can be loaded on the MX3 or PC that will send data using
IRPLUS.EXE. IRECV.C, after compiling, can be loaded on the MX3 or PC that will
receive data using IRPLUS.EXE.
Quick Start
In brief, the process (without IRSEND and IRECV) is as follows:
1.
Load the IrDA Lite Plus file, IRPLUS.EXE, into the appropriate (e.g. \IRDA)
subdirectory on the sending and receiving units (e.g. MX3 or PC).
2.
Add the IRPLUS.EXE device command line to the CONFIG.SYS file in the MX3
and/or PC.
The CONFIG.SYS command line format is shown below. The ‘=’, ‘ ‘ (space), ‘/’,
and ‘:’ are required punctuation in the command line. The parameters are optional.
device=path\irplus.exe [/p:baud]
Default values used when command line parameters are not provided are: Port (p)
= COM1 and Baud = 9600
COM 1 Example: device=c:\irda\irplus.exe /1:96
COM 2 Example: device=c:\irda\irplus.exe /2:96
4
3.
If necessary, add the appropriate subdirectory name (e.g. \IRDA) to the PATH
command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
4.
Reboot the MX3 and/or PC.
Upgrade or transfer files to MX3 Flash by sending files to Drive C.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
IrDA Lite Plus
99
5.
During the MX3 bootup process, access the BIOS Setup. (For instruction please
see Chapter 4, “System Configuration”.)
Verify that PM Enable is Enabled. Verify the CPU parameter is set to Aggressive
(Aggressive waits one second before slowing the clock).
Note:
IrDA Lite Plus sends frames at approximately 160 mSec.
If performance becomes an issue, set the CPU to Moderate. (System Menu | PM |
CPU).
Change the parameter value if necessary. Select the SCU “Save/Reboot” exit
option and continue the MX3 reboot operation.
A message similar to the following is displayed as the IrDA Lite Plus driver loads on the MX3
and/or PC:
IrDA Lite Plus Driver Version
X.XX using COM1 with maximum
speed at 9600 bps.
File Transfer Using IR Ports
Note:
The MX3 and the external computer must be running the same communication software.
When using a PC that does not have an installed IR port, a commercially available serial to
infrared adapter is required. Connect the adapter to the PC’s serial port before continuing.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
1.
If necessary, enable the IrDA protocol driver (IRPLUS.EXE) in the MX3
CONFIG.SYS file.
2.
Begin running the communications software on the receiving unit. Set up the
software to receive data.
3.
Begin running the communications software on the sending unit. Set up the software
to send data.
4.
Face the infrared ports on the two devices toward each other, and place the units
approximately 3 feet apart. Offset the optical centerline of the two devices 15
degrees. The IR operating envelope has a distance range of 2 cm (.79 inches) to 1
meter (3.2 feet) with a viewing angle of 30 degrees.
5.
Press the appropriate keys on the units to transmit the file.
MX3 Reference Guide
100
IrDA Lite Plus
File Transfer Using RS-232 Ports
Note:
The MX3 and the external computer must be running the same communication software.
The MX3’s RS-232 endcap is COM1 or COM2. The RS-232 port on a PC may be COM1 or
COM2.
1.
If necessary, disable (REM out) the IrDA protocol driver (IRPLUS.EXE) in the
MX3 CONFIG.SYS file.
2.
Connect the appropriate serial cable to the MX3’s RS-232 endcap port and the serial
port on the external computer.
3.
Begin running the communications software on the receiving unit. Set up the
software to receive data.
4.
Begin running the communications software on the sending unit. Set up the software
to send data.
5.
Press the appropriate keys on the MX3 to transmit the file to the external computer
or press the appropriate keys on the computer to transmit the file to the MX3.
Send MX3 File to a Printer
Perform the steps in “Quick Start” on the MX3. This will power up the MX3, edit the
CONFIG.SYS files, the AUTOEXEC.BAT files, load the IrDA Lite Plus file and establish the
COM port / baud rate to use for printing.
Note:
Load the DOS file PRINT.EXE into the DOS subdirectory of the MX3.
When the DOS prompt (e.g. C:\>) appears, you are ready to begin.
1.
Load the file to be printed into a subdirectory on the MX3.
2.
Face the infrared ports on the MX3 and the printer (e.g. O’Neill MicroFlash) toward each
other, and place them approximately 3 feet apart. Offset the optical centerline of the two
devices 15 degrees. The MX3’s IR operating envelope has a distance range of 2 cm (.79
inches) to 1 meter (3.2 feet) with a viewing angle of 30 degrees.
3.
Using the file name of the file to be printed (prntfile), type the following, at the DOS
prompt, on the MX3:
copy prntfile Press [Enter]
4.
Press [Enter] again to accept the default device (PRN).
The file is sent through the IR port of the MX3 and is printed at the printer.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
IrDA Lite Plus
101
IrDA Lite Plus and MX3 and Powered Cradles
The powered cradle (both Desk Top and Vehicle Mount) is an MX3 mobile computer accessory
which provides physical storage, power, and infrared to wired communication for the MX3. The
MX3 is fully operational when it is in the cradle. The cradle must be connected to an approved
power source for the processes that are described in this section. The MX3 may also be connected
to an external power source through its power jack while the cradle is connected to a power
source as well.
Note:
No software is required or present in the powered cradle.
With IrDALite Plus the MX3 passes infrared data in both directions. The MX3 has an infrared
port that passes the data through to the RS-232 serial port on the cradle. The data is passed
between the infrared port and the RS-232 port without any protocol interpretation.
Before files can be transferred using the powered cradle, the MX3 can be either 1) fully seated in
the cradle or 2) held in the hand with it’s IR port facing the IR port on the cradle. The cradle must
be connected to a power source. The cradle can be mounted on a table, wall or vehicle.
When the MX3 is seated in the cradle the IR port on the MX3 and the cradle line up.
You could use the powered cradle to send data between:
•
an MX3 and a PC with a serial to infrared adapter.
•
an MX3 and a PC with an RS-232 null modem cable connecting the PC with the
cradle.
•
an MX3 and an IrDA-compatible printer.
File Transfer Using IR Ports
Note:
Both units must be running the same communication software.
Make sure peripherals and accessories are powered on: cradle, printer, PC, etc. Connect required
cables: RS-232 null modem for PC or non-IrDA printer, commercially available serial to infrared
adapter for PC.
Perform the steps in “Quick Start”. This will power up the sending and receiving units, edit the
CONFIG.SYS file, the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, load the IrDA Lite Plus file and establish the
COM port / baud rate to use for file transfer.
1.
Place the MX3 in the cradle, seating the IrDA window firmly against the IrDA
window in the cradle. The IrDA port is now the COM2 port.
2.
Make sure the cradle has power.
3.
Begin running the communications software on the receiving unit. Set up the
software to receive data.
4.
Begin running the communications software on the sending unit. Set up the software
to send data.
5.
Press the appropriate keys on the units to transmit the file.
During transmission, the Status LED will turn red. When transmission is complete the Status LED
will turn green
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
102
IrDA Lite Plus
Print Through Cradle
Make sure peripherals and accessories are powered on: cradle, printer, PC, etc. Connect required
cables: RS-232 null modem for PC or non-IrDA printer, commercially available serial to infrared
adapter for PC.
Perform the steps in “Quick Start”. This will power up the MX3, edit the CONFIG.SYS file, the
AUTOEXEC.BAT file, load the IrDA Lite Plus file and establish the COM port / baud rate to use
for file transfer.
Note:
Load the DOS file PRINT.EXE into the DOS subdirectory of the MX3 in the cradle.
When the DOS prompt (e.g. C:\>) appears on the MX3, you are ready to begin.
1.
Seat the MX3 firmly into the cradle. Make sure the cradle has power.
2.
Make sure the file to be printed is on the MX3.
3.
Using the file name of the file to be printed (prntfile), type the following, at the DOS
prompt, on the MX3:
copy prntfile
4.
Press [Enter]
Press [Enter] again to accept the default device (PRN).
During transmission, the cradle’s Status LED will turn red. When transmission is complete the
Status LED will turn green.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
IrDA Lite Plus
103
IRSEND and IRECV Files
Compile IRSEND.C and IRECV.C files using Borland C/C++ Version 4.5 compiler. The
“include” files listed are standard Borland C/C++ Version 4.5 library files.
Note:
When using these files, the receiving MX3 or PC must have IRPLUS.EXE and IRECV
files loaded. The sending MX3 or PC must have IRPLUS.EXE and IRSEND loaded.
IRSEND.C
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
<stdio.h>
<ctype.h>
<io.h>
<fcntl.h>
<sys\stat.h>
<conio.h>
<dos.h>
<bios.h>
<time.h>
#define BUF_SIZE
4096
char
buf[BUF_SIZE];
// 60
void delay_ms(unsigned int tm)
{
clock_t tmp, endTm;
tmp = clock() + tm;
while (1) {
endTm = clock();
if (endTm > tmp);
break;
}
}
unsigned stopExec()
"CONTROL D" key
{
int key;
// return TRUE if "ESC" key or
/* Read and display keys until ESC or "CNTL D" is pressed.
*/
while( kbhit() ) {
/* If first key is 0, then get second extended. */
key = getch();
if( (key == 0) || (key == 0xe0) )
key = getch();
/* Echo character response to prompt. */
if(( key == 0x1b) || ( key == 4))
// "ESC" key or
"COntrol D"
return (1);
}
return (0);
}
void main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
int
status, count, fh, i, comPort = 0xffff;
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
104
IrDA Lite Plus
unsigned long
bytesSend = 0;
unsigned char
*c;
clock_t
start, tmp;
/* IS.EXE filename */
fprintf(stderr, "\nIrPlus Version 1.00, write size %d
bytes.\n", BUF_SIZE);
// check which COM port
__asm {
mov
ax, 0ffffH
mov dx, 0ffffH
int 14H
cmp
ax, dx
jz
COMM
jmp
DONE
COMM:
mov
comPort, ax
DONE:
}
if (comPort < 0) {
fprintf(stderr, "IrPlus is not installed.\n");
return;
}
if (argc <= 1) {
fprintf(stderr, "enter a filename to send.\n");
return;
}
#if 0
/* comPort 0 for COMM1 */
if (((status = _bios_serialcom(_COM_STATUS, comPort, 0)) < 0)) {
fprintf(stderr, "IrPlus does not exit, status %x\n",
status);
return;
}
#endif
/* open file */
if ((fh = open(argv[1], O_RDONLY|O_BINARY)) == -1) {
fprintf(stderr, "cannot open the %s file.\n", argv[1]);
return;
}
/* open connection */
fprintf(stderr, "connecting...\n");
__asm {
mov
ax, 0fffeH
mov dx, comPort
int 14H
mov status, ax
}
if (status < 0) {
/* cannot open connection */
close(fh);
fprintf(stderr, "connection timeout\n");
goto CLOSE_CONN;
//return;
}
else
fprintf(stderr, "sending file %s \n", argv[1]);
//delay_ms(2000);
start = clock();
status = 0;
while (status >= 0) {
if (stopExec())
break;
putchar('|');
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
IrDA Lite Plus
105
count = read(fh, buf, sizeof(buf));
if (! count) {
fprintf(stderr, "\nsend complete\n");
break;
}
if (count == -1) {
fprintf(stderr, "\nreading %s error\n", argv[1]);
break;
}
/* send data */
for (c = buf, i = 0; i < count; i++, bytesSend++) {
//while (_bios_serialcom(_COM_STATUS, comPort,
0) < 0){;}
/* send a char */
if ((status = _bios_serialcom(_COM_SEND,
comPort, *c++)) < 0) {
fprintf(stderr, "\nsend error %x\n",
status);
break;
}
if (! (bytesSend & 0x00ff))
putchar('.');
}
}
start = clock() - start;
fprintf(stderr, "\n%lu ms\n", start);
fprintf(stderr, "send %lu bytes\n", bytesSend);
#if 0
// close 5 second later
start = clock() + 5000;
while (1) {
tmp = clock();
if (tmp > start)
break;
}
#endif
close(fh);
CLOSE_CONN:
/* close connection */
__asm {
mov
ax, 0ffffH
mov dx, comPort
int 14H
mov
status, ax
}
if (status < 0) { /* cannot disconnection */
fprintf(stderr, "disconection failured, status %x\n",
status);
}
}
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
106
IrDA Lite Plus
IRECV.C
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
<stdio.h>
<ctype.h>
<io.h>
<fcntl.h>
<sys\stat.h>
<conio.h>
<dos.h>
<bios.h>
#define
BUF_SIZE
4096
char
buf[BUF_SIZE];
// 60
unsigned stopExec()
"CONTROL D" key
{
int key;
// return TRUE if "ESC" key or
/* Read and display keys until ESC or "CNTL D" is pressed.
*/
while( kbhit() ) {
/* If first key is 0, then get second extended. */
key = getch();
if( (key == 0) || (key == 0xe0) )
key = getch();
/* Echo character response to prompt. */
if(( key == 0x1b) || ( key == 4)) // "ESC" key or
"COntrol D"
return (1);
}
return (0);
}
void main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
unsigned char
*c;
unsigned long
bytesRecvd = 0;
int
status, comPort = 0xffff;
int
fh;
unsigned int
i, writen;
/* IR.EXE filename */
fprintf(stderr, "\nIrPlus Version 1.00, read buffer size %d bytes.\n", BUF_SIZE);
// check which COM port
__asm {
mov ax, 0ffffH
mov dx, 0ffffH
int 14H
cmp
ax, dx
jz
COMM
jmp
DONE
COMM:
mov
comPort, ax
DONE:
}
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
IrDA Lite Plus
107
if (comPort < 0) {
fprintf(stderr, "IrPlus is not installed.\n");
return;
}
if (argc <= 1) {
fprintf(stderr, "enter a filename.\n");
return;
}
#if 0
/* comPort 0 for COMM1 */
if (((status = _bios_serialcom(_COM_STATUS, comPort, 0)) <
0)) {
fprintf(stderr, "IrPlus does not exit, status %x\n",
status);
return;
}
#endif
fh = -1;
if (_dos_creat((const char *)argv[1], _A_NORMAL, &fh) != 0)
{
fprintf(stderr, "cannot create a file %s\n",
argv[1]);
return;
}
if (fh < 0){
fprintf(stderr, "cannot open a file %s\n", argv[1]);
return;
}
/* open connection */
fprintf(stderr, "connecting...\n");
__asm {
mov
ax, 0fffeH
mov dx, comPort
int 14H
mov status, ax
}
if (status < 0) { /* cannot open connection */
close(fh);
fprintf(stderr, "connection timeout\n");
goto CLOSE_CONN; //return;
}
else
fprintf(stderr, "write to file %s\n", argv[1]);
/* read data */
for (i = 0, c = buf; (1); bytesRecvd++) {
#if 1
if (stopExec())
break;
#endif
if (! (bytesRecvd & 0x00ff))
putch('.');
status = _bios_serialcom(_COM_RECEIVE, comPort, 0);
if (status < 0)
{
/* timeout */
if (i) {
putch('|');
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
108
IrDA Lite Plus
if (_dos_write(fh, buf, i,
&writen) != 0)
fprintf(stderr, "\nwrite file error3\n");
else {
if (i != writen)
fprintf(stderr, "\nwrite file
error4\n");
}
}
break;
}
*c++ = (unsigned char)status;
if (++i >= sizeof(buf)) {
putch('|');
if (_dos_write(fh, buf, i, &writen) != 0)
{
fprintf(stderr, "\nwrite file error1\n");
break;
}
if (i != writen) {
fprintf(stderr, "\nwrite file error2\n");
break;
}
i = 0; c= buf;
}
}
_dos_close(fh);
fprintf(stderr, "\n%lu bytes received\n", bytesRecvd);
CLOSE_CONN:
/* close connection */
__asm {
mov
ax, 0ffffH
mov dx, comPort
int 14H
mov
status, ax
}
if (status < 0) { /* cannot disconnection */
fprintf(stderr, "disconection failured, status %x\n",
status);
}
}
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
LXE BCWEDGE
109
LXE BCWEDGE
This DOS based utility, BCWEDGE.EXE, is installed by LXE.
This Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR) program is used to redirect input from COM1 or COM2
to the BIOS key ring buffer. This DOS based utility enables the use of a barcode scanner on a
COM port, provided power is available on that port. The software interprets data from the scanner
as keyboard data, thus it will work with DOS applications such as EDIT. It will not function on
Microsoft Windows 95 platforms.
When a terminal emulator program is started after the wedge utility has initialized, the keyboard
interrupt used by the wedge utility is trapped and used by the terminal emulator. The keyboard
interrupt needed by the wedge utility is no longer available.
Note:
It is the responsibility of the application programmer to make the MX3 beep on errors,
etc., when running the wedge utility.
Parameters
Command line:
BCWEDGE c=# b=baud s=dps [opt unitname]
Example:
BCWEDGE c=1 b=9600 s=8N1 2381
Sets BCWEDGE to use COM1, 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit
on an MX3 platform.
The command to unload the wedge TSR is BCWEDGE -u.
Default options for BCWEDGE are: COM1, 9600 baud, 8, N, 1. Options are not case sensitive.
Parameter
Explanation
-h
Displays BCWEDGE command line options.
-u
Uninstall the TSR
c=#
Communications port.
Default: COM1
Options: 1, 2
Note:
B=baud
The optional endcaps on an MX3 are COM1 and COM2. The MX3’s
IR Port is COM2.
Sets the baud rate.
Default: 9600
Options: 9600, 19200
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
110
LXE BCWEDGE
Parameter
Explanation
s=dps
data / parity /stop
Data
Default: 8
Options: 5, 6, 7, 8
Parity
Default: N
Options: N, O, E, M, S
(None, Odd, Even, Mark, Space)
Stop
Default: 1
Options: 1, 2
unitname
Optional. Enables the scanner for the specifically designated computer.
Default: 2381
Options: 1330, 2330, 2381
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
LXE Diagnostics
111
LXE Diagnostics
Note:
Make sure there is a fully charged battery in the MX3 before beginning a diagnostic
process. When using an external power supply, make sure there is an uninterrupted
power source for the MX3. When using the MX3 in a powered cradle make sure there is
an uninterrupted power source for the cradle.
The MX3 comes equipped with several utility programs. These programs can be run to make
adjustments as indicated.
LXE does not recommend running these commands in a DOS window from any Microsoft
Windows application.
Filename
Description
BBDIS81.EXE
Battery Discharge Utility
Condition the 50 mAh NiCd Backup Battery mounted on the system
board. The battery discharge starts and when discharged switches to
backup battery charge mode.
BBTST81.EXE
Backup Battery Test Utility
Indicates the current status of the backup battery and the voltage.
BEEP81.EXE
Beeper Utility
Changes the volume of the beeper using the up and down arrow keys on
the keypad/keyboard.
COMTST81.EXE
Communication Port Utility
To diagnose the serial communication port, a simple loop back test
routine is included in this file. The figure showing how to build a loop
back plug is included in this chapter. The test results will read PASS or
FAIL. A failure is identified and described.
DISP81.EXE
Display Utility
Activates every pixel on the display to verify functionality.
KEY2381.EXE
Keyboard Utility
This utility performs a contact functional test of each key on the
keyboard. When activated, the key labels appear on the screen and then
each key, when initialized, clears the key label from the screen.
LXEF.EXE
File Transfer Utility
Transfer files to and from a PC through any of the MX3’s COM ports, as
well as act as the agent for the Win32 Developer Toolkit Application.
PARAM81.EXE
Parameter Dump Utility
This utility collects the setup configurable parameters and lists them in a
text file.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
112
LXE Diagnostics
Filename
Description
SCU.EXE
Scanner Configuration Utility
Allows programming multiple scanners with the same data.
SETAPI_4.EXE
Set An API Function
Runs an API call to set a mode or change a parameter.
TSCAL.EXE
Touchscreen (Digitizer) Calibration Utility
Calibrates the touchscreen to the display screen area.
TSTEST.EXE
Touchscreen (Digitizer) Test Utility
Verifies touchscreen calibration when the data mode is set in
compensated mode.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
LXE Diagnostics
113
Backup Battery Test Utility (BBTST81.EXE)
This command is run at the DOS prompt. There are no parameters.
Run this command file to view the current status of the backup battery and the voltage.
If the backup battery needs to be replaced, the unit must be returned to LXE for service (see
Chapter 1, “Introduction”, section titled “Getting Help”.)
Battery Discharge Utility (BBDIS81.EXE)
This command is run at the DOS prompt. There are no parameters.
Use this command file to condition the backup battery mounted on the system board. When the
program is initiated, the battery discharge process begins, “Discharging” is displayed on the
screen and the voltage changes are displayed. When discharge is complete (at approximately 4V),
the battery charge process begins. The word “Charging” appears on the screen and the voltage
changes are displayed.
If the backup battery needs to be replaced, the unit must be returned to LXE for service (see
Chapter 1, “Introduction”, section titled “Getting Help”.)
Beeper Utility (BEEP81.EXE)
This command is run at the DOS prompt. There are no parameters.
Running this executable file will set the beeper to a single beep and turn the beeper on. The
beeper or speaker volume can be changed at this time using the volume control keys – see next
section “Volume Control Keys”. The volume is increased or decreased one step each time the
volume key is pressed and the changed beep tone is emitted. The program is ended by pressing the
<Esc> key.
Volume Control Keys
To adjust the beeper volume, locate the <F8> key at the top of the keypad. Adjust the
beeper volume by pressing the:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
•
2nd key, then the <F8> key
•
Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to adjust volume until the beeper volume
is satisfactory.
•
Press <Enter> to accept the change and exit the Volume change mode.
MX3 Reference Guide
114
LXE Diagnostics
Communication Port Utility (COMTST81.EXE)
This command is run at the DOS prompt. There are no parameters. The program requires LXE
cable part number 155746-0001.
This command file is used to test the TX, RX and handshaking lines of the unit’s COM port. A
loopback connector is needed to perform this test. The configuration of the connector for the RS232 endcap follows.
Note:
The optional endcap with an RS-232 serial port, when installed in the MX3, is COM1 or
COM2. The MX3’s IR Port is COM2.
RS-232 Endcap Connector
Figure 5-1 RS-232 Serial Connector (COM1 or COM2)
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
or
+5V DC
Description
Data Carrier Detect – Not Connected
Receive Data – Input
Transmit Data – Output
Data Terminal Ready – Not Connected
Signal/Power Ground
Data Set Ready – Not Connected
Request to Send – Output
Clear to Send – Input
Ring Indicator – Input (Default)
or
Bar Code Scanner Power -400mA max
(Use BIOS Setup software to configure)
RS-232 Endcap COM Port
Loopback Configuration
7
RTS
3
TX
CTS
8
RX
2
Figure 5-2 RS-232 Endcap COM Port Loopback Configuration
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
LXE Diagnostics
115
Display Utility (DISP81.EXE)
This command is run at the DOS prompt. There are no parameters.
Run this command file to test the screen display. It will draw a border around the display, wait for
an <Enter> keypress, and then fill the inside of the box by turning on all the pixels. There are a
total of 640 pixels across and 240 pixels down the display area – 0,0 is located at the upper left
and 640,240 is located at the lower right.
File Transfer Utility (LXEF.EXE)
(Obsolete -- Replaced by REMSERV and REMDISK)
The LXEF.EXE utility gives you the ability to both transfer files to and from a PC through either
the MX3’s serial port or IR port, as well as act as the agent for the Mobile Enterprise SDK
Application. If neither the transmit file (/t) or the receive file (/r) option is specified, LXEF runs in
client mode, and will respond to both file transfer requests and remote information requests from
the Mobile Enterprise SDK Application.
Syntax:
LXEF
[ /option1 /option2 … ] [ filename ]
Options:
/Com? [ : # ]
where either Com1 or Com2 is used to indicate which com port is to be
used and optionally # can be set to represent the baud rate. E.g.:
/Com2:9600 (default) tells the utility to use the serial transfer protocol
through COM2 at 9600 baud. The serial protocol is also compatible
with multiple MX3’s running concurrently in powered cradles.
/Irda [ : # ]
where Irda indicates that the utility should use the IrDA protocol
through the IrDA port. # represents the baud rate and by default (and
with some of the cradles) is set to 9600 baud.
/h
displays the help message for the LXEF command.
/o
Existing files may be overwritten during file transfers. If this option is
not used, file transfers will return an error if the specified file exists.
/r
receives the specified file and then LXEF exits.
/t
transmits the specified file and then LXEF exits.
/q
Indicates that the LXEF utility should restrict its display messages to a
minimum.
Filename is either the name of the file to send or receive if LXEF is being used to transfer files.
Keyboard Utility (KEY2381.EXE)
This command is run at the DOS prompt. There are no parameters.
Use this command file to display the keyboard key labels on the screen. As each key is pressed, its
label is cleared from the screen.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
116
LXE Diagnostics
Parameter Auto-Detect Utility (PARAM81.EXE)
The Parameter Auto-Detect Utility (PARAM81.EXE) is used to search for user-configurable
parameter files and then write the data to a text file. The utility is a DOS stand-alone program -- it
does not require that other files (except standard DOS operating system files) be present in the
MX3 before it will run.
The utility captures data from the following files:
BIOS Setup
AUTOEXEC.BAT
CONFIG.SYS
LXE.INI file
NET.CFG file
SOCKET.CFG file
The MX3 setup parameters. See Chapter 4, “System Configuration”.
DOS command file. See Chapter 4, “System Configuration”, for an
example.
DOS command file. See Chapter 4, “System Configuration”, for an
example.
LXE terminal emulation parameter file.
Radio command file. See Chapter 4, “System Configuration”, for an
example.
Radio command file. See Chapter 4, “System Configuration”, for an
example.
and places the data in an ASCII text file called PARAM.DAT.
The ASCII text file should then be printed out or copied to a PC or floppy disk and stored for
safekeeping. The information in the text file may be used, as a reference, to reconstruct parameter
values if the files become unreadable or to program several MX3’s with the same values.
The Parameter Auto-Detect Utility filename is PARAM81.EXE and it creates a text file called
PARAM.DAT. The PARAM.DAT file may be renamed and the next time PARAM81.EXE is run,
a new PARAM.DAT file will be created. The combined file size is approximately 50K and both
files may be deleted from the MX3 if more disk space is needed in the unit.
Run Parameter Auto-Detect Utility
The file must be run from the DOS command line.
Using DOS commands, change the DOS prompt to the drive letter and subdirectory of the DOS
files (for example, C:>\DOS).
At the DOS prompt type the following command to run the utility:
PARAM81 and press Enter.
The PARAM.DAT file is created and stored in the DOS subdirectory on the MX3.
Use DOS commands to copy the PARAM.DAT file to another media or print the file.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
LXE Diagnostics
117
Scanner Configuration Utility (SCU.EXE)
This utility allows programming multiple scanners with the same data. It copies barcode setup
parameters from one barcode scanner and places them in a file. The file can then be sent to
another barcode scanner, and when the receiving unit reboots, the receiving unit’s initial scanner
configuration is replaced with the new configuration. This utility is used for MX3’s with a
scanner/serial port and scanner/scanner endcap.
This command is run at the DOS prompt.
The file can be sent to another MX3 using the MX3’s IR ports. The file can be transferred from
one MX3 to another on an SRAM card. Or, the file can be transferred to a PC with a data transfer
communication program installed and a commercially available null modem cable attached to a
serial port. The cable must have a connector compatible with the MX3’s RS-232 endcap DB9
male connector and the calling PC.
The MX3 is set up with data transfer communication parameters of 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop
bit, and No parity when the
SCU.EXE utility runs on the MX3.
Menu Options
1. Parameter Request
Select this option to collect barcode configuration data from a barcode scanner.
The data is stored in a file on the calling PC. Give the file an 8-character name, using
standard DOS naming conventions, e.g. yourfile. No extension is necessary. Press
<Enter>.
The scanner configuration file is given an extension of .SCN. The file can be copied to
another directory or PC or renamed after its creation.
2. Parameter Send
Select this option to send barcode configuration data to a barcode scanner.
When “Open File” appears on the screen, type the name of e.g. yourfile and press
<Enter>. The receiving MX3 reboots when the scanner configuration file has finished
transferring.
3. Exit
Select this option to exit the scanner configuration utility.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
118
LXE Diagnostics
Set An API Function (SETAPI_4.EXE)
This command is run at the DOS prompt. Run this command at the DOS prompt to set a mode or
change a parameter.
All arguments are in HEX format. Put an X in the place of arguments that are not used.
Format for INT 10:
SETAPI_4 arg1 arg2 arg3 arg4 arg5 arg6
where
•
arg1 is always 10
•
arg2 - (AH) = 12
•
arg3 - (BL) = BA (Panning) or BC (DOS Font)
•
arg4 - (AL) = Function Requested
•
arg5 - (BH) = Value Requested
•
arg6 - (CX) = Value Requested
Format for INT 15:
SETAPI_4 arg1 arg2 arg3 arg4 arg5 arg6 arg7
where
•
arg1 is always 15
•
arg2 - (AH) = BA
•
arg3 - (AL) = Service Group
•
arg4 - (BH) = Function Number
•
arg5 - (BL) = Action
•
arg6 - (CX) = 16 Bit Register Value (where appropriate)
•
arg7 - (DX) = 16 Bit Register Value (where appropriate)
INT 15 Example:
Sound Beeper
SETAPI_4 15 BA 53 4 30 07D0 000A
Please refer to the “LXE DOS API Programming Guide” for complete
information about the MX3 Application Programming Interfaces.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
LXE Diagnostics
119
Example – Enable COM2 for
Tethered Scanner
The process used to enable the MX3 COM2 port for use with a tethered scanner has three steps:
1.
2.
BIOS Setup
•
Select Advanced Menu / Select Other / Select COM2 Pin9:
•
Change the parameter value to 5V.
•
Select Exit Menu / Save and Exit
Terminal Emulation Configuration Utility (if used) e.g. ANSI Plus TE:
•
Select System Menu / RFFileModeCfg
•
Change the parameter value to Comm1 Out, Comm2 In
•
Select Exit with Save Option.
3.
DOS
•
Add the following line to the AUTOEXEC.BAT file on the line above any existing
SETAPI_4 commands:
SETAPI_4 15 ba 56 31 01 x x
Note:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
If COM1 port is an integrated scanner, the integrated scanner is disabled by this
procedure.
MX3 Reference Guide
120
LXE Diagnostics
Touchscreen Calibration (TSCAL.EXE)
Note:
If you run TSCAL.EXE on an MX3 that does not have the optional touch screen installed,
the MX3 must be powered off then on again.
Note:
It is very important that the stylus touch be as accurate as possible to ensure proper
calibration.
The transparent touch panel overlays the LCD display. Calibration ensures that the stylus touch is
translated as accurately as possible. For proper positioning of touch points, the touch screen must
be calibrated to the viewing area. The 0,0 coordinates reside in the lower left-hand corner of the
touch panel. As each stylus touch is processed, its X,Y coordinates are sent to the PS/2 controller
on the system board as raw data coordinates. Any application of calibration offsets or averaging
must be performed by the software driver or application software.
This command is run at the DOS prompt. There are no parameters.
The first calibration point is at the lower left hand corner and it appears on the display as a
crosshair icon (+). Press the stylus down on the center of the crosshair and hold for three seconds.
The second calibration point is located at the top right hand corner – press the stylus down on the
center of the second crosshair and hold for three seconds.
When the calibration process is finished, “Process Complete” is displayed on the screen.
See also section titled “Touchscreen Test”.
Touchscreen Test (TSTEST.EXE)
The TSTEST.EXE program is run at the DOS prompt. There are no parameters.
Menu:
1.
8Bit, Raw
2.
8Bit, Comp
3.
12Bit, Raw
4.
12Bit, Comp
5.
POLL MODE
6.
INT MODE
7.
Exit
Enter:
Process - Get Raw Data:
MX3 Reference Guide
1.
Select 5 for Polled Mode. “Polled” is displayed for a few seconds and is then erased.
2.
Select 1 or 3 (as desired) and the test criteria are displayed on the screen. For
example, upon selecting (1), “8-Bit”, “Raw” and “Polled” are displayed on the
screen for a few seconds.
3.
The next screen displays three crosshairs equidistant between two arrows diagonally
from bottom left to upper right – x,y coordinates are also displayed.
4.
With a stylus, press on the tip of the arrows and in the center of the crosshairs one at
a time, starting from the bottom left arrow.
5.
The x,y coordinates increase in value when moving from the bottom left corner
arrow tip to the top right corner arrow tip.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
LXE Diagnostics
121
6.
Press <E> key to return to the menu.
Process - Get Compensated Data:
1.
Select 5 for Polled Mode. “Polled” is displayed for a few seconds and is then erased.
2.
Select 2 or 4 (as desired) and the test criteria are displayed on the screen. For
example, upon selecting (2), “8-Bit”, “Compensated” and “Polled” are displayed on
the screen for a few seconds.
3.
The next screen displays two arrows and three crosshairs diagonally from left to
right – x,y coordinates of either 0,0 or 640,240 are also displayed.
4.
With a stylus, press on the tip of the arrows and in the center of the crosshairs one at
a time, starting from the bottom left arrow.
5.
The x,y coordinates should be within these ranges:
Arrow Location
x
y
-5 to 5
-5 to 5
Left lower crosshair center
154 to 164
54 to 64
Middle crosshair center
314 to 324
114 to 124
Upper right crosshair center
474 to 484
174 to 184
Upper right arrow tip
634 to 644
234 to 244
Left bottom arrow tip
6.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Press <E> key to return to the menu.
MX3 Reference Guide
122
The NED ASCII Text Editor
The NED ASCII Text Editor
NED uses the standard Microsoft Windows interface for cut, copy, and paste operations. Del and
Shift+Del both move the selected block to the clipboard. There is no true undo command, but
Ctrl+V or Shift+Ins may be used to paste the clipboard contents to the current cursor position.
Table 1 lists all the default shortcut keys.
The NED editor is a menu-based text editor available for use with ROM-DOS. This editor is
similar to other desktop editors but has special functions designed for use in editing C-source and
assembly code.
To start the editor, enter
NED [filename] [filename]
NED may be initiated with or without filename arguments. Wildcard file specifications are
allowed.
Up to ten files can be entered on the command line. If NED is run without arguments, it loads all
files accessed during the last editing session, returning you to the exact position in the file. You
can switch between the open files.
You can also enter
NED @errfile
where errfile is the name of your compiler error output file. NED loads all files that had errors and
allows you to move between errors.
Once NED is running, you may load files into memory by using the File/Open menu command.
File/Reload replaces the current file with a new file or reloads a new copy of the same file.
File/Reload confirms before replacing an unsaved file.
•
If a search string is all lowercase, NED treats it as a case-insensitive search. If a search
string contains any uppercase letters, it is case sensitive. The replacement string is
inserted exactly as entered. Repeating a Search command repeats the last Forward or
Backward Search operation, not the last Replace operation.
•
There is one bookmark for all files. Once the bookmark is set, going to the bookmark
returns you to the file and position where you set it.
•
The Indent and Remove-indent (referred to as Undent in the Options/Do Command)
commands work on tabs. Indent inserts a tab at the beginning of the current line, or if a
block is active, at the beginning of each line in the block. Remove-indent removes the
first tab from the current line or from each line in the block. If there are no tabs, Removeindent has no effect.
•
Toggle case inverts the case of the current character if no block is active. If a block is
active, Toggle case sets the entire block to uppercase if the first character was lower and
to lowercase if the first character was uppercase.
•
Tabs are currently set to 3 for .C, .H, .CPP, .HPP, and .T files. They are set to 8 for all
other files.
•
File/Print prints the current block if there is one, otherwise it prints the current file. NED
prompts for a device to print to, which may be a filename. Tabs are expanded to spaces.
•
The Options/Do Command is intended primarily for debugging. This command allows
you to execute any editor command by choosing it from a menu list.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
The NED ASCII Text Editor
123
•
The macro commands (Record Macro/Play Macro) allow you to define a sequence of
keystrokes that can be repeated repetitively. Select Record Macro (ALT=), enter the
keystrokes, then press ALT= again. The macro sequence can be played by selecting Play
Macro or by pressing ALT-. Keyboard bindings are saved in NED.CFG in the same
directory as NED.EXE. NED.CFG also contains the list of active files and positions.
•
If you record and play a recursive macro, it plays continuously.
•
If you press an invalid key on a menu, NED operates as if you pressed enter.
•
If you run out of memory, such as when you have more than 300KB of files open, NED
returns to DOS.
NED Default Hot Keys
Many of the editor commands can be accessed directly by pressing key combinations. For
example, press Alt-X to exit the editor and save any open files. The following table lists the
default hot keys.
Key
Alt-Q
Alt-X
Ctrl-A
Ctrl-B
Ctrl-C
Ctrl-D
Ctrl-E
Ctrl-F
Ctrl-G
Ctrl-I
Ctrl-K
Ctrl-L
Ctrl-M
Ctrl-N
Ctrl-P
Ctrl-Q
Ctrl-R
Ctrl-S
Ctrl-T
Ctrl-U
Ctrl-V
Ctrl-W
Ctrl-X
Ctrl-Z
Alt =
Alt Alt-F7
Alt-F8
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Function
Quit without saving
Exit, saving as needed
Search again
Search backward
Copy the block to clipboard
Find the mark
Erase to end-of-line
Search forward
Go to a line number
Indent the block
Toggle block mode
Delete line to the clipboard
Set the mark
Read a file into a new buffer
Move to the previous position
Quote the next character
Replace text
Switch to the next buffer
Toggle the case of character(s)
Remove indent from the block
Insert the clipboard
Delete word to the clipboard Ins
Delete block to the clipboard
Cancel the selected block
Start/end recording macro
Playback macro
Previous error
Next error
Key
F1
F7
F9
F10
Left-Arrow
Right-Arrow
Up arrow
Down arrow
Home
End
Page Up
Page Down
Center (5)
Ctrl-Left-Arrow
Ctrl-Right-Arrow
Ctrl-Up-Arrow
Ctrl-Down-Arrow
Ctrl-Home
Ctrl-End
Ctrl-Page
Ctrl-Page
Toggle
Del
Backspace
Ctrl-Ins
Ctrl-BackSpace
Shift-Ins
Shift-Del
Function
Help
Load file into current buffer
Save file
Exit asking for save as needed
Left one character
Right one character
Up one line
Down one line
Beginning of line
End of line
Up one screen
Down one screen
Center the cursor onscreen
Left one word
Right one word
Up one C function
Down one C function
Scroll toward beginning of file
Scroll toward end of file
Up Beginning of file
Down End of file
Insert/Overwrite mode
Delete character
Delete character backward
Copy block to clipboard.
Delete word backward
Insert the clipboard
Delete block to clipboard
MX3 Reference Guide
124
Serial File Transfer Utility
Serial File Transfer Utility
A null modem cable must be used to connect the two computers. Both computers must have both
REMSERV and REMDISK set to the same settings. REMSERV is run on the host (which is
usually the mobile computer). REMDISK is run on the client (which is usually a desktop or laptop
PC).
Using this utility you can move files from one computer to the other over the serial line using the
DOS Copy or Xcopy commands.
REMSERV
REMSERV.EXE
d: [/T] [/H] [/Bxxxx][+|-] [/COMn] [/IRQn]
/Bxxxx
Set the baud rate. Choose from 300, 1200, 2400, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115. A ‘+’
after the BAUD specifies ‘packet’ style transfers. By default, packet transfers will
be used for all baud rates higher than 9600. Use ‘-’ after the BAUD to force polling
operation under Microsoft Windows 95. Both sides must agree on using either ‘+’
or ‘-’.
/COMn
Set the communications port. Choose 1, 2, 3 or 4.
/IRQn
Set the IRQ for the communications port. choose 3-15.
/S
Silent (no output)
/Tnnn
Set the timeout in seconds. Choose 2-3640, 15 seconds is not unusual for FLASH
drives.
/H
Use Hardware Handshaking for flow control.
Example:
REMSERV D: /B38400- /COM2 /T10
Default:
/B115+ /COM1 /T2
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Serial File Transfer Utility
125
REMDISK
REMDISK
[/?] [/U] [/T] [/H] [/Bxxxx][+|-] [/COMn] [/IRQn]
/Bxxxx
Set the baud rate. Choose from 300, 1200, 2400, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115. A ‘+’
after the BAUD specifies ‘packet’ style transfers. By default, packet transfers will
be used for all baud rates higher than 9600. Use ‘-’ after the BAUD if REMSERV is
running under Microsoft Windows 95. Both sides must agree on using either ‘+’ or
‘-’.
/COMn
Set the communications port. Choose 1, 2, 3 or 4.
/IRQn
Set the IRQ for the communications port. Choose 3-15.
/Tnnn
Set the timeout in seconds. Choose 3-3640, 15 seconds is not unusual for FLASH
drives.
/H
Use Hardware Handshaking for flow control.
/U
Unload REMDISK from memory
Examples:
(in CONFIG.SYS)
DEVICE=REMDISK.EXE /T15
(in AUTOEXEC.BAT)
REMDISK /B9600 /COM2 /T10
Default:
/B115K+ /COM1 /T3
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
126
MX3 Reference Guide
Serial File Transfer Utility
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Chapter 6 RF Network Configuration
Introduction
Note: The information and programs in this section only pertain to LXE’s 2.4GHz system
radios. They do not work with LXE’s 900MHz system radios.
Change the radio parameters by editing the NET.CFG file in the PCTCP directory. This can be
done with any ASCII text editor or NED. The NET.CFG file is the configuration file used by the
radio card’s ODI driver. The NET.CFG file determines the wireless network name, the
workstation name and other information regarding the wireless system.
2.4GHz radio parameters cannot be changed using LXE’s terminal emulation (TE) configuration
utilities.
The Sockets software package provides an interface to all of the TCP/IP parameters. Parameter
configuration is performed by editing the file SOCKET.CFG.
SNMP DOS Agent
The SNMP DOS agent executable resides in the \AGENT directory. For information on
enabling/disabling the SNMP Agent, please refer to the “DOS Autoconfigurator Instructions”. For
details on Agent operation, please refer to the “SNMP Agent Reference Guide”. Both manuals
are available in electronic format on the LXE Manuals CD.
The agent is placed into memory as a TSR and uses approximately <50k of memory. When the
agent is not being polled, it is invisible to the user. When it is being polled, there is a slight delay,
depending on how much data is being retrieved by the agent.
Avalanche
When the unit is configured to use Avalanche for network settings, manual changes made to
NET.CFG and SOCKET.CFG may be overwritten.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
128
NET.CFG Parameters
NET.CFG Parameters
Lucent Parameters
The following is a list of parameters that can be modified in the NET.CFG file for computers with
Lucent 2.4GHz radios. For additional information about the parameters in this file, see the
WVLAN43.CFG file located in the PCTCP directory. To set the TCP/IP parameters, see the
SOCKET.CFG file documentation.
Link Support
Parameter used to define resources for the LSL.COM file. Any modifications may cause resource
conflicts.
Protocol
Instructs TCP/IP stack to bind to radio driver.
WaveLAN_Network_Name
Identifies the WaveLAN network the station will connect to.
Valid:
Default:
0 to 32 string of printable uppercase
characters.
ANY
Note:
Setting this value to ANY will enable the station to connect to any IEEE 802.11 network.
Note:
The string for WaveLAN_Network_Name is case-sensitive. The WaveLAN DOS ODI
driver requires the use of only UPPERCASE characters. If you have configured the
Access Points with lower-case names you will need to change your Access Point
WaveLAN_Network_Name parameter to UPPERCASE characters for proper operation.
Or, place double quotes around the WaveLAN_Network_Name to allow proper operation
with upper and lower case letters e.g. “NameofUnit”.
Station_Name
Identifies the stations on the network. This parameter is used when performing diagnostic tests.
Valid:
Default:
0 to 32 string of printable characters.
station_name
AP_Distance
Controls the roaming sensitivity of your computer. This parameter must be set according to the
settings of the WavePOINT-II access points.
Valid:
Default:
MX3 Reference Guide
1=Low
2=Medium
3=High
1
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
NET.CFG Parameters
129
Microwave_Robustness
This option should only be used when troubleshooting slow performance of the network that
could be related to in-band interference from microwave ovens.
Use this option when experiencing recurrent “bursts” of in-band interference exhibited by specific
units where the unit (or the access point) is close to a microwave oven or a microwave oven is
located in the signal path between the unit and the access point. The radio will try to retransmit the
“lost messages”. When retransmission fails again, the radio in Auto Transmit Rate Select
Mechanism mode will attempt to retransmit the message again at a lower data speed. (See
Transmit_Rate)
Selecting “Y” will enable fragmentation of data frames when the automatic transmit rate selection
switches to a lower transmit rate. Fragmentation will avoid increased vulnerability due to longer
frame lengths of transmissions at lower data speeds.
Valid:
Default:
Y=Yes, N=No
N
Transmit_Rate
Controls the data rate the WaveLAN card will use. Supported rates depend on the card. If the card
does not support the selected rate, the default value of 3 is selected automatically.
Valid:
Default:
1=Fixed Low
2=Fixed Standard
3=Auto Rate Select (High)
4=Fixed Medium
5=Fixed High
6=Auto Rate Select (Standard)
7=Auto Rate Select (Medium)
3
Medium_Reservation
Enables RTS/CTS communications. Sets the frame length threshold that determines when the
station should start using RTS/CTS.
Valid:
Default:
Note:
0-2347
2347
The use of Medium Reservation is recommended in network environments where the
density of the WaveLAN stations and WavePOINT-II access points is very low, and
where there is poor network performance due to excessive frame collisions at the
WavePOINT-II access points.
Card_Power_Management
Configures the power management used by the station in an ESS. The recommended mode is
Enhanced Power Management (EPM) for hand held computers. In this mode, the station switches
between Power Save Mode (PSM) and Continuous Active Mode (CAM), based on activity. Any
frame transfer switches the station to CAM. Inactivity for 100ms switches the station to PSM.
For vehicle mount computers, the default is CAM.
Valid:
Default:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
0=CAM (No power management)
1=EPM
2=PSM (Maximum power savings)
1
MX3 Reference Guide
130
NET.CFG Parameters
Maximum_Sleep_Duration
Configures the maximum amount of time the radio will stay in Sleep mode.
Valid:
Default:
1-65535
100 (10 seconds)
Receive_All_Multicasts
Configures whether this station will receive Multicast packets.
Valid:
Default:
Y=Yes or N=No
N
Enable_Encryption
Configures whether this station will receive/send encrypted data traffic. When “Y” is chosen, the
unit will be able to receive both non-encrypted data and messages encrypted with one of the listed
WEP encryption key values (see Transmit_Key_ID).
If encryption is enabled (Y) while the card does not support WEP, an error is reported.
Valid:
Default:
Y=Yes or N=No
N
Transmit_Key_ID
If you enable WEP encryption, you can select one key for wireless data transmissions from the list
of WEP Encryption Key Values.
Key1
Key2
Key3
Key4
abcde
0x123456789a
abcdefghijkl2
0x112233445566778899AABBCCDD
Valid:
Default:
Format:
MX3 Reference Guide
1-4
1
Transmit_Key_ID 1
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
NET.CFG Parameters
131
Proxim Parameters
The following is a list of parameters that can be modified in the NET.CFG file. To set the TCP/IP
parameters see the SOCKET.CFG file documentation.
Link Support
Parameter used to define resources for the LSL.COM file. Any modifications may cause resource
conflicts.
Protocol
Instructs TCP/IP stack to bind to radio driver.
Int
Sets the interrupt (IRQ) line to be used. MX3 specific setting is int 5.
Default:
5
Port
Sets the I/O port address. Use 270 for the MX3.
Default:
0x270
Mem#1 (ODI)
Memory_address sets the resource memory location (0xC000 to 0xE800). Upper memory blocks
from 0xA000 to 0xCFFF are used by MX3 system software.
Default:
ce00
Domain
Sets the network domain. It can be any number from 0 through 15 and must match the domain of
the server or access point to which you want to connect.
Valid:
Default:
0 through 15
0
Station_type
Sets the status of the PC card as a master (2), alternate master (1), or nonmaster (0) station.
Valid:
Default:
0, 1, 2
0
Socket
Sets the PCMCIA socket (A, B, C, or D) that has the PC card installed.
Valid:
Default:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
A, B, C D
A
MX3 Reference Guide
132
NET.CFG Parameters
Initialize_365
Determines whether to initialize the Intel 82365SL PCMCIA controller chip.
Valid:
Default:
Y, N
Y
Inactivity_min
Sets the number of minutes of inactivity before the PC card goes to sleep. To minimize draw on
the vehicle battery, set this to 0.
Valid:
Default:
0 through 20 minutes
0
Inactivity_sec
Sets the number of seconds of inactivity before the PC card goes to sleep. Valid settings are 0
through 55 (values above 5 are rounded to the nearest multiple of 5). To minimize draw on the
vehicle battery, set this as low as possible, preferably to 1.
Valid:
Default:
0 through 55 seconds
1
Channel
Sets the channel to be used when the PC card is acting as the master.
Valid:
Default:
1 through 15
1
Subchannel
Sets the subchannel to be used when the PC card is acting as the master.
Valid:
Default:
1 through 15
1
Mac_optimize
Optimizes the PC card for the number of concurrent modes.
Valid:
Default:
0 (light) or 1 (normal)
1
Roam_config
Sets the roaming speed.
Valid:
Default:
0 (slow), 1 (normal) or 2 (fast)
1
Peer_to_peer
Sets the ability of the PC card to talk to other peers.
Valid:
Default:
MX3 Reference Guide
N (off) or Y (on)
N
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
NET.CFG Parameters
133
Cisco Parameters
The following is a list of parameters that can be modified in the NET.CFG file. To set the TCP/IP
parameters see the SOCKET.CFG file documentation. Unless otherwise noted, the following
parameters apply to both Cisco 340 series and 350 series radios.
Link Support
Parameter used to define resources for the LSL.COM file. Any modifications may cause resource
conflicts.
Protocol
Instructs TCP/IP stack to bind to radio driver.
LEAP
Used to set LEAP (Light Extensible Authentication Protocol) authentication on LXE computers
equipped with Cisco 350 series radios.
Valid:
Default:
Note:
OFF or ON
OFF
This parameter is valid for Cisco 350 series radios only.
WorldMode
Allows the radio to adopt the maximum transmit power level and frequency range of the access
point to which it is associated (available only in infrastructure mode).
Valid:
Default:
Note:
OFF or ON
OFF
This parameter is valid for Cisco 350 series radios only.
ShortPreamble
This parameter allows the radio to use short radio headers (or preambles). Short radio headers
improve throughput performance. Long radio headers ensure compatibility if a client or access
point does not support short radio headers.
Valid:
Default:
Note:
0=auto
1=long
2=short
0
This parameter is valid for Cisco 350 series radios only
AWCLEAP
AWCLEAP is a DOS utility used to set LEAP (Light Extensible Authentication Protocol)
authentication for Cisco 350 radios. The SETLEAP.BAT file runs the AWCLEAP utility. To set
LEAP, type setleap <username> <password> at the c:\pctcp prompt.
The CLEAR.BAT file is used to clear the LEAP username and password. To clear LEAP, type
clear at the c:\pctcp prompt.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
134
NET.CFG Parameters
SSID
Identifies the 802.11B wireless network the station will connect to.
Default:
Note:
“”
Setting this value to “” will enable the station to connect to any IEEE 802.11b network.
FragThreshold
Packet size to start fragmenting.
Default:
FragThreshold
2312
RTSThreshold
Packet size to start sending RTS/CTS.
Default:
RTSThreshold
2312
DataRateX
To set a data rate other than 11 MB default uncomment rate desired and all data rates less than
that rate. Example to set for 5.5MB data rate uncomment the DataRate1, DataRate2 and
DataRate3.
1 Mbps supported data bit rate
DataRate1
0x02
2 Mbps supported data bit rate
DataRate2
0x04
5.5 Mbps supported data bit rate
DataRate3
0x0B
11 Mbps supported data bit rate
DataRate4
0x16
RefreshInterval
Inactivity time to check association with AP
RefreshInterval
10000
PowerSaveMode
PowerSaveMode
“FASTPSP”
Fast Power Save Mode
MaxPowerSave
Maximum power save mode
MaxPowerSave
"ON"
NodeName
Descriptive station name
NodeName
MX3 Reference Guide
" "
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
NET.CFG Parameters
135
WEP enable
To enable WEP uncomment the following line and set the key with the wepdos.exe utility
authtype
"wepopen"
Set WEP key in radio before wepopen using the WEPDOS program in the PCTCP directory.
Diversity
The diversity parameter must be set according to the number of antennas for each computer. To
determine left and right, hold the Cisco radio with the label side up and look directly at the
antenna ports.
MX3 computers = 2 antenna
Diversity “on” - for 2 antennas
Diversity “left” - for 1 antenna left port
Diversity “right” - for 1 antenna right port
PortBase – IRQ – Memory Socket
The adapter needs 32 16-bit I/O ports, and 1 non-sharable IRQ. Any commented lines are set by
PCMCIA card & socket services and should not be changed or uncommented.
;PortBase
;IRQ
Memory
;Socket
140
5
C9000
1
BusType
PCMCIA interface is used on all LXE DOS computers.
BusType
"PCMCIA"
Frame
Frame type of wired and wireless network.
(Default) Frame ETHERNET_II
Frame ETHERNET_802.3
Frame ETHERNET_802.2
LongRetryLimit
Specifies the number of times an unfragmented packet is retried before it is dropped and a
transmit error is reported to the driver.
Valid:
Default:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
0 – 255
6
MX3 Reference Guide
136
NET.CFG Parameters
WEPDOS
WEPDOS utility is used to program the WEP key into the Cisco 340 radios. Once the key value
and key number to be used is set the authtype parameter in NET.CFG file must be modified. To
set the key type wepdos at the c:\pctcp prompt.
Syntax
WEPDOS
WEPDOS
WEPDOS
WEPDOS
[-ascii|-hex] [-key#|-home] key ;set a key
[-key#|-home] –clear
;clear a key
[-tx#]
;select transmit key index
[-d]
;display settings
Where
key is a 5 character ascii string
key is a 10 character hex-digit number
WEP128 allows 5 or 13 character ascii, and 10 or 26 hex-digit keys
-key# is default key index 1, 2, 3 or 4
-home selects the home key for use with home access points
-tx# selects the transmit key index 1, 2, 3 or 4 (enterprise networking)
Standard Options
-p[iobase]
-b[membase
-i[irq]
-s[slot]
-365
Default:
io base address (hex) [380]
memory base address (hex) [D000]
interrupt request (decimal) [10]
slot number (decimal) [0]
82365 startup of card
no startup, IO:380, MEM:D000:0, IRQ:10, SLOT:0
Examples
To check wep key on a LXE computer the correct syntax type at c:\ prompt
Wepdos –365 –p340 – bcc00 -d
To set key for use type
Wepdos -365 -hex -key# <10 or 26 byte key> -tx# -d
WEPDOS supports up to 4 keys. As an example of setting key number 3 to 0f0f0f0f0f for use in
transmitting type:
Wepdos -365 –p340 –bcc00 –s1 –hex -key3 1234567890 -tx3 –d
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
NET.CFG Parameters
137
Symbol Parameters
The following is a list of parameters that can be modified in the NET.CFG file. To set the TCP/IP
parameters see the SOCKET.CFG file documentation. Unless otherwise noted, the following
parameters apply to both Symbol FHSS (2Mb) and Symbol 4121 (11Mb) series radios,
Link Support
Parameter used to define resources for the LSL.COM file. Any modifications may cause resource
conflicts.
Protocol
Instructs TCP/IP stack to bind to radio driver.
ESS_ID
Identifies the 802.11B wireless network the station will connect to. The ESS_ID is a string of 1 to
31 case sensitive characters. Spaces may be included by using quotes.
Default:
“LXE”
cardservices
To use card and socket services, you must load slainit before slaodi. iodaddress, memory,
interrupt and socket lines must be commented with ;.
Default:
Note:
yes
This parameter is valid for Symbol FHSS radios only.
socketservices
To use card and socket services, you must load slainit before slaodi. iodaddress, memory,
interrupt and socket lines must be commented with ;.
Default:
Note:
yes
This parameter is valid for Symbol FHSS radios only.
mode
IO mode required if using card and socket services.
Default:
IO
ioaddress
Sets the I/O address location.
Default:
300
memory
Sets the resource memory location.
Default:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
CC00
MX3 Reference Guide
138
NET.CFG Parameters
interrupt
Sets the interrupt (IRQ) line to be used.
Default:
5
powermgmt
Configures whether the Symbol FHSS radio card will perform power management.
Valid:
Y=Yes or N=No
Default:
N
Note:
This parameter is valid for Symbol FHSS radios only.
performance_index
Configures whether the Symbol 4121 series radio will perform power management.
Valid:
Default:
Note:
0=CAM Constant Awake Mode
1=Power Management On
1
This parameter is valid for Symbol 4121 series radios only.
Auth_type
This parameter is used to enable and manage the 802.11 WEP encryption. The radio card will
only associate with APs that support the same Auth_type.
Note:
Valid:
“Open_System” or “Shared_Key”
Default:
“Open_System”
This parameter is valid for Symbol 4121 series radios only.
Encrypt-Key#
Updates the first, second, third or fourth encryption key, according to the value of #.
For Symbol 4121 series radio cards, use 5 pairs of hex digits for 40 bit encryption. Use 13 pairs
of hex digits for 128 bit encryption.
encrypt_enable
Enables encryption on Symbol 4121 series radios.
Valid:
Default:
yes or no
yes
Note:
This parameter is valid for Symbol 4121 series radios only.
Note:
This parameter was removed from the Symbol NET.CFG file by LXE effective 11/ 2003.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
NET.CFG Parameters
139
Encrypt_Key_ID
The key ID indicates which key the adapter is to use for encrypting packets.
Valid:
1 to 4
Default:
1
Note:
This parameter is valid for Symbol FHSS radios only.
Encrypt_Enable_Index
Previously named encrypt_key_index. This parameter indicates which key the adapter is to use for
encrypting packets for transmission. Zero means No Encryption (i.e. turn encryption off), and
numbers 1 through 4 mean turn encryption on and use the specified key (i.e. key #1, key #2, key
#3 or key #4). The key to be used to decrypt packets being received is contained in the received
packet.
Valid:
Default:
Note:
0,1,2,3,4
0
(No Encryption)
This parameter is valid for Symbol 4121 series radios only.
diversity
Set diversity to “both” for two antennas and “A” for one antenna.
Default:
Note:
both
This parameter is valid for Symbol 4121 series radios only.
Tx_rate
Use this parameter to specify that rates at which the radio is allowed to operate. If no rates are
specified, the radio will use all available rates.
Valid:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
1
2
5
11
1 Mbps
2 Mbps
5.5 Mbps (Symbol 4121 series only)
11 Mbps (Symbol 4121 series only)
MX3 Reference Guide
140
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
Introduction
SOCKET.CFG sets the options for SOCKETP.EXE. The section XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX is for
this machines IP. The net mask is specified as part of the ip address. In the ip address command an
optional /net_bits can be used to indicate the number of bits in the network ID.
Net
Bits
Net Mask
Class
IP address range
8
255.0.0.0
A
0.x.x.x to 127.x.x.x
16
255.255.0.0
B
128.x.x.x to 191.x.x.x
24
255.255.255.0
C
192.x.x.x or higher
The network can be subdivided by two for every net bit added.
Net
Bits
Net
Mask
Net
Bits
Net
Mask
1
128
5
248
2
192
6
252
3
224
7
254
4
240
8
255
Bootp
BOOTP is a UDP/IP based protocol that provides a means to assign an IP address to a booting
host dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP can also supply the net mask, host name,
and address of a domain name server. One obvious advantage of this procedure is the centralized
management of network addresses, which eliminates the need for per-host unique configuration
files. Sockets implements the BOOTP client whenever it is started with no (or the 0.0.0.0) IP
address supplied.
DHCP
DHCP is a UDP/IP based protocol that provides a means to assign the IP address dynamically to a
booting host and without user supervision. It can also supply the net mask, host name, address of a
domain name server, and other parameters. An advantage of this procedure is the centralized
management of network addresses, which eliminates the need for per-host unique configuration
files. Sockets implements the DHCP client whenever it is started with the 0.0.0.1 IP address
supplied. All LAN interfaces specified when this IP address is in use will attempt to use DHCP to
resolve the IP address, the subnet mask, hostname, default router and DNS server(s).
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
141
Setting SOCKETS.CFG Parameters
Set IP Address
To enable DHCP set the IP address to 0.0.0.1
IP address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/16
where
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX is the IP address
16 indicates the number of bits in the network ID
Set ARP INIT
Controls whether a DHCP ARP is sent when booting up.
ARP INIT GRAT
Using this option makes the stack behave the same as before. The stack does not send a DHCP
ARP when booting up (In this mode, the ARP contains the MAC and IP addresses in the sender’s
field). This option is the default.
ARP INIT DHCP
Using this option sends a DHCP ARP on boot up (the sender’s IP address field is zero filled).
Set Interface
For all radios except Symbol DS 11MB
Interface sets the physical interfaces
Interface pdr if0 dix 1500 10 0x69
where
pdr = packet driver
if0 = interface_card
dix = frame type
1500 = MTU
10 = Buffers
0x69 = ioaddr
For Symbol DS 11MB radios
Interface sets the physical interfaces
Interface pdr if0 dix 1400 10 0x69
where
pdr = packet driver
if0 = interface_card
dix = frame type
1400 = MTU
10 = Buffers
0x69 = ioaddr
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
142
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
Set Router IP (Gateway only)
When using a gateway (IP router) to the rest of the world, replace “XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX” with
your gateway ip and remove the # at the beginning of the line.
# route add default if0 XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Set Domain Name Server
When using a domain name server (DNS), replace XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX with the IP address of
the DNS, and remove the # at the beginning of the line.
# domain server XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Display IP Address
Redisplay IP information when SOCKET.CFG runs.
IP address
Options
For all radios except Symbol DS 11MB
Refer to documentation to change.
ip ttl 15
tcp mss 1460
tcp window 2920
tcp retry 8
tcp irtt 500ms
For Symbol DS 11MB radios
Refer to documentation to change.
ip ttl 64
tcp mss 1360
tcp window 2920
tcp retry 8
tcp irtt 500ms
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
143
SOCKET.CFG Parameters
domain
If a host name is not a decimal (dotted) address and it is not found in the HOSTS file and at least
one Domain Name Server has been defined, an attempt is made to obtain the address from the
defined DNS server(s). The number of times any server is polled (retries), in addition to the time
to wait for a response, can also be specified. A suffix may be specified and is attached to all
names not containing any dots.
All of the following sub-commands can be issued without the optional parameters to obtain
information on the current status.
Syntax
domain
domain
domain
domain
server [host_name]
retry [retry_count]
time [wait_time]
suffix [domain]
domain server adds a DNS address or lists the current servers if host_name not specified.
domain retry specifies the retry count for polling each server. domain retry lists the retry count if
retry_count not specified.
domain time specifies or lists the time (milliseconds) to wait for a response before attempting
retry.
domain time lists the time (milliseconds) to wait if wait_time not specified.
domain suffix specifies the domain suffix to add to all simple names; names that contains no dots.
domain suffix lists the domain suffix if domain is not specified.
Example
domain
domain
domain
domain
retry 3
server 196.2.1.1
suffix myorg.co.za
time 2000
iface
iface is a synonym for the interface command.
interface
interface informs Sockets of the hardware or software communications interface(s) to be used at
the network interface level. At least one network interface is required, and two or more are used in
gateway (router) applications.
The class or mode of each interface defines the encapsulation used for packaging the data frame
into the transport frame. Some types of interface support only one class.
When using more than one interface, Sockets assigns the previous given IP address in the .CFG
file to this interface and uses its net mask to add a route to that net through this interface. Using
the same IP address would result in multiple routes to the same network. The default route is set
on the first interface with an IP address with a zero net mask (for example, IP address
19.63.10.11/0).
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
144
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
Each interface statement uses the IP address from the last supplied IP address statement.
Syntax (general)
interface type name class other parameters
Syntax (specific)
interface pdr name dix mtu numbuf intvec [irq]
interface asy name [slip | cslip | ppp] mtu buflim ioaddr
iovec speed [modemfile]
Parameters
Type
Type defines the type of hardware or software interface.
interface supports the following software interfaces.
Interface
Description
Asy
Standard PC asynchronous interface (RS232 port)
Pdr
packet driver interface
name
name defines the name by which the interface is known on the local host. name is a symbolic
name known only to the local host on which it is used.
name may be arbitrarily assigned. Each interface command on the same host must have a unique
name assigned. This name is used by commands such as route, trace, param, and so on.
class
class specifies how IP datagrams are to be encapsulated in the link level protocol of the interface.
Some interfaces offer a choice between classes while others use a fixed class. The following
classes are available and are listed with their associated types.
MX3 Reference Guide
Type
Class (defined in the following list)
Pdr
dix, ieee, token, driver, slip
Asy
raw, slip, cslip, ppp
Class
Description
Dix
The DEC/Intel/Xerox Ethernet interface also known as Blue Book
Ethernet or Ethernet II.
Token
IBM Token Ring. Source routing is supported for multiple rings.
Ieee
IEEE: 802.3 Ethernet with SNAP headers.
Driver
Use the default class for the packet driver.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
145
Class
Description
Slip
Serial Link Internet Protocol (SLIP) for point-to-point
asynchronous links. This mode is compatible with UNIX SLIP.
Cslip
Compressed Serial Link Internet Protocol (SLIP) for faster reaction
over point-to-point synchronous links.
Ppp
Point-to-point protocol over asynchronous links.
mtu
mtu specifies the Maximum Transmission Unit size, in bytes. Datagrams larger than this limit are
fragmented into smaller pieces at the IP layer. The maximum value of mtu for the various
interfaces is:
Ethernet - 1500
For serial links a standard value for mtu is 576. (576 is the maximum according to specifications,
but may be increased on reliable connections as long as both sides use the same value.)
numbuf
numbuf specifies how many incoming datagrams may be queued on the receive queue at one time.
If this limit is exceeded, further received datagrams are discarded. This mechanism is used to
prevent fast interfaces from filling up memory when data cannot be handled fast enough.
buflim
buflim specifies the maximum number of outgoing datagrams or packets to queue before starting
to discard datagrams. This mechanism is used to prevent the memory from filling up when a serial
link goes down.
bufsize
bufsize specifies the size of the ring buffer in bytes to be allocated to the receiver in raw mode.
intvec
intvec specifies the software interrupt number (vector) in hexadecimal to use for resident packet
drivers.
ioaddr
ioaddr is the I/O base address in hexadecimal of a serial port or the hardware controller and must
correspond with the jumper or switch settings used during the setup of the controller board. The
standard values for serial ports are:
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
03F8h
02F8h
03E8h
02E8h
MX3 Reference Guide
146
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
iovec
iovec is the hardware interrupt vector used by the serial port or controller and must correspond
with the jumper or switch settings used during setup of the controller. The standard values for
serial ports are:
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
4
3
4
3
irq
irq is the hardware interrupt vector used by the network interface controller. This is only used for
faster response in Sockets.
modemfile
A file containing the modem commands and scripts.
speed
speed specifies the transmission speed for serial interface devices (baud rate). Before using a
serial connection you have to set flow control with the param command.
Examples
interface pdr if0 dix 1500 5 0x60
interface asy ser0 cslip 576 15 0x3f8 4 9600
interface asy p0 ppp 1500 30 0x3f8 4 9600 pppmod.mod
ip
ip displays or sets the values of the options selected when defining the IP (internet protocol) host
address of the next interface to be defined.
Syntax
ip address [hostid [/net_bits] ]
ip status
ip ttl [number]
ip address sets the IP host address of the next interface to be defined. A route is automatically
added to each interface for the default or specified net mask for its address. To make an automatic
route the default, specify the net bits as zero. When specified without the optional parameters, ip
address displays the current value(s) of the local host IP address(es). To assign different IP
addresses to different interfaces on the same host, an ip address statement must precede each
interface definition. The last IP address given is used in case of missing ip address statements.
ip status displays Internet Protocol (IP) statistics, such as total packet counts and error counters of
various types. It also displays statistics on the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). This
includes the number of ICMP messages of each type sent or received.
ip ttl sets the default time-to-live value which is placed in each outgoing IP datagram. The ttl
value limits the number of gateway hops the datagram is allowed to take in order to kill datagrams
that got stuck in loops.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
147
Parameters
hostid
hostid specifies the IP host address to assign to the next interface to be defined. This may be a
symbolic name from the HOSTS file, or a dotted decimal address.
/net_bits
A net mask can be specified for the host. In the ip address command an optional /net_bits can be
used to indicate the number of bits in the network ID. The net mask is used to determine whether
an incoming datagram is a broadcast and also for sending UDP broadcasts.
Net masks are more easily represented in binary or hexadecimal format. For example, the IP
address 128.1.1.5/24
corresponds to a net mask of 255.255.255.0 (FFFFFF00h),
25 bits to 255.255.255.128 (FFFFFF80h)
and 26 bits to 255.255.255.192 (FFF FFC0h).
The default net mask used corresponds to the class of address used if not explicitly specified.
Net Bits
Net Mask
Class
IP address range
8
255.0.0.0
A
0.x.x.x to 127.x.x.x
16
255.255.0.0
B
128.x.x.x to 191.x.x.x
24
255.255.255.0
C and higher
192.x.x.x or higher
If you want to subdivide your network, you can divide it by two for every net bit added. The
following table provides information on converting between net bits and net mask. The number of
net bits to add when changing a 0 in the net mask to:
Net Bits
Net Mask
Net Bits
Net Mask
1
128
5
248
2
192
6
252
3
224
7
254
4
240
8
255
number
When number is omitted, ip ttl displays the current value of the time to live parameter.
param
param invokes a device-specific control routine. When executed without parameters, param
displays defined interface names and device-specific flags. param operates differently for each
interface type and even interface mode. In many cases it is used to interrogate the status of an
interface. The ifstat and param commands perform similar and, in some cases, exactly the same
function.
Syntax
param ifname [arg1...argn]
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
148
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
Parameters
ifname
ifname defines the name used in the interface command for the device to be controlled.
arg1...argn
These parameters depend on the type of interface in use.
Example
To display current serial link settings and restart the statistics on it, use:
param sl0 clear
param, Alternative Routing Control Sub-commands
The Alternative Routing Control Sub-commands set up and check the Sockets alternative route
mechanism. More than one route can be specified to a target host or network. The first route
which has an associated interface in the up state is used.
An interface is in the up state when it is defined by the interface command. It enters the query
state when it does not receive valid input within a specified up-time period after sending data
expecting a response. At this stage three (catering for links with a high data loss) ICMP echo
requests (ping) are sent to a query IP address. It enters the down state by a Sockets command or
when it does not receive valid input within the specified up-time period after entering the query
state. If an up-time has never been specified or a value of 0 is specified, the interface will stay in
the up state whether valid input is received or not.
An interface enters the up state by a Sockets command or when valid input is received on that
interface when in the down or query states. An ICMP echo request is sent on an interface in the
down state every down-time period. If a down-time has never been specified or a value of 0 is
specified, the ICMP echo request will not be sent. Up-time and down-time is specified in seconds.
Syntax
param ifname [ uptime | downtime ] time
param ifname query hostname
Example Alternative Routing
Two X.25 interfaces are used to get to the target network 192.6.1.0. The first interface, named if0
should preferably be used, but if it stops receiving for a period of 20 seconds, it should try to ping
192.6.1.2 and if no response is received within another 20 seconds, if1 should take over, but if0
should be tried every five seconds. Interface if1 should disconnect after 80 seconds of no traffic.
The SOCKET.CFG file should contain the following:
interface
param if0
param if0
param if0
interface
param if1
param if1
param if1
route add
route add
x25 if0 ... ... ...
uptime 20
downtime 5
query 192.6.1.2
x25 if1 ... ... ...
uptime 80
downtime 5
query 192.6.1.2
192.6.1.0 if0
192.6.1.0 if1
In the case of both if0 and if1 failing, both are tried every five seconds until one comes up. The
return paths should also be maintained in a similar way with Sockets or by using RIP.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
149
param, RIP Advertising Sub-command for Interfaces
When the rip advertise command has been used, this param sub-command makes allowance to
disable and re-enable RIP advertising on a specific interface.
Syntax
param ifname [ ripadv | noripadv ]
Examples
param if0 noripadv
param if1 ripadv
route
route creates an entry in the IP routing table for Sockets to determine where to send data. The
Alternative Routing mechanism allows more than one route to be specified to a particular host or
network. Failure of one route causes an automatic switch to the next route.
Refer also to the ip address command for specifying the net mask, because a route is automatically
added to each interface for the default or specified net mask for that address. When multiple
routes are defined to the same address, Sockets uses the route with the network size (largest
number of bits in the net mask).
Syntax (general)
route [ add | drop destination ifname [gateid |none [
metric [proxy] [private] [static] ] ] ]
Syntax (specific)
route
route
route
route
route
route
add [ hostid | netid ] ifname [gateid]
add [ hostid | netid[/mask] ] ifname [gateid]
add default ifname
drop [ hostid | netid ]
drop [ hostid | netid[/mask] ]
drop default
Parameters
add or drop
Sub-command to add or drop (remove) a route from the routing table.
default
All transmissions to IP addresses not otherwise defined in routing commands are sent via the
network interface specified by ifname.
hostid
hostid is the IP address of a destination remote host to which data must be sent, or a remote host
which must be removed from the routing table (dropped).
netid
netid is the IP address of a destination network to which data must be sent. Any host with this IP
network address is able to receive the data. Whether a particular host will use the data depends on
the host portion of the specific IP address in the IP header.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
150
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
mask
mask specifies the number of bits in the network portion of the address if sub-netting is used. If
not used, the network portion of the address is determined according to the class (A, B or C) of
the address.
ifname
ifname defines the name used in the interface command for the immediate network on which the
data for the designated host must be sent. This is the network level interface to be used by the
local host to reach the remote host.
gateid
gateid parameter specifies the IP address of a host, on the same physical network as the local host,
which is used as a gateway or router to a different network. The gateway or router host specified
in gateid must be directly reachable on the same physical network as the local host defining this
gateway. In other words, this must be the nearest gateway to this local host.
metric
When using RIP or Proxy ARP a value from 0 to 16 for metric must be specified indicating the
distance or cost of that route. A metric of 16 indicates that the route is down.
proxy, private and static
To support the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) the route command utilizes the proxy, private
and static key words. These words can be used in any order following metric.
Proxy ARP should be used with care and not in conjunction with RIP. When more than one host
responds to an ARP request, it can cause confusion and even lead to system crashes. This is
possible in situations where more than one gateway implements Proxy ARP to a common
destination.
When “RIP advertising” is selected, all interfaces advertise all routes except those routes making
use of that specific interface (split horizon) and routes marked private. A route which is dropped
as a result of a RIP update or which becomes unavailable as a result if its associated interface
going into the down state, is immediately advertised as being infinite (metric = 16) and is not
advertised until it becomes available again. In order for an interface to be used for advertising, a
route without a gateway using that interface must be available. The advertisement is sent as a subnet broadcast using the net mask of the host and the IP address of the interface.
When “RIP using” is selected, routes are updated according to received RIP advertisements.
Routes added or amended as a result of RIP, have a timeout associated with them. If another RIP
advertisement is not received during that time, the route is dropped. A route is also dropped if an
advertisement of infinity (metric = 16) is received. To prevent dropping a route, it must be marked
as static. The metric of a route marked static is never updated by a RIP advertisement. Instead a
duplicate route is added before the static route. If the duplicate route is dropped as a result of a
timeout or RIP, the static route is used again.
Examples
route
route
route
route
route
route
route
MX3 Reference Guide
add default ipx0
add unix_net eth0
add unix_host ipx1
add unix_net2 eth0
add unix_ net ipx0
add subnet/26 eth0
drop unix_net
unx_gate
/eth 1
unx_ gate
sub_gw
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
151
route can specify a Proxy ARP on a route, as follows:
route add net interface gateway metric [proxy]
When using Proxy ARP, gateway and metric must be specified. If no gateway is used, none can
be specified. For example:
route add 192.6.1.0 ifx25 none 5 proxy
tcp
tcp commands display or set various TCP operating parameters. The TCP configuration
commands are put into SOCKETS.CFG.
Syntax
tcp
tcp
tcp
tcp
tcp
tcp
tcp
tcp
irtt [time]
lport [port_number]
mss [size]
retry [number]
rtt [time]
smss [size]
timemax [time]
window [size]
Parameters
time
time is the new time value in seconds, or milliseconds if “ms” is appended to the number, as in
2000ms.
port_number
port_number is the local port starting number.
size
For tcp mss, size is the maximum segment size in bytes sent on all outgoing TCP connect requests
(SYN segments). size tells the remote host the size of the largest segment that may be received by
this host. When changing the MSS value, any existing connections remain unchanged.
For tcp smss, size is the send maximum segment size in bytes sent on all outgoing TCP connect
requests. This limits the size of the largest segment that may be sent by this host. When changing
the SMSS value, any existing connections remain unchanged.
For tcp window, size is the size of the receive window in bytes for any new TCP connections.
Existing connections are unaffected.
number
number is the number of retries attempted without receiving an acknowledge from the remote host
before the connection is broken. If the value exceeds 255, it implies an infinite number of retries;
such a connection does not time-out. The default value for number is 6.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
152
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
tcp irtt Sub-command
tcp irtt displays or sets the initial round-trip-time estimate. When specified without an argument,
the command displays the current values of TCP parameters including the initial round-trip-time
in milliseconds.
time is the initial round-trip-time (IRTT) estimate and is used for new TCP connections until the
actual value can be measured and adapted to. By increasing this value when operating over slow
communication links, unnecessary retransmissions that otherwise occur before the smoothed
estimate value approaches the correct value are minimized. The system default is 5000
milliseconds.
To affect incoming connections, tcp irtt should be executed before the servers are started.
Example
tcp irtt 120
Sample Output
TCP: IRTT 5 ms Retry 6 MSS 1460 SMSS 1460 Window 2920
tcp lport Sub-command
tcp lport specifies the local port starting number. When specified without a number the current
value of the next free local port number is displayed.
Example
tcp lport 2004
Sample output
Lport = 2004
tcp mss Sub-command
tcp mss displays or sets the TCP maximum segment size in bytes. When size is not specified, the
current values of the TCP parameters, including the maximum segment size, are displayed. It is
recommended to reduce the MSS and SMSS on bad network connections.
Example
tcp mss 1460
tcp retry Sub-command
tcp retry displays or sets the retry count before a connection is broken. When specified without the
number parameter, tcp retry displays the current values of TCP parameters, including the retry
count.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
153
tcp rtt sub-command
tcp rtt replaces the automatically computed round-trip time (RTT) for the specified connection
with the time in milliseconds. Sockets calculates the RTT as a smooth average of past measured
RTTs, starting with the IRTT on a new connection.
To get the current RTT in use for a connection n, use the tcp status n command that will give the
smoothed average RTT indicated by SRTT.
Because tcp rtt provides a manual override of the normal back-off retransmission timing
mechanisms, it may be used to speed up recovery from a series of lost packets.
Example
tcp rtt 4 100
tcp smss sub-command
tcp mss displays or sets the TCP send maximum segment size in bytes. When size is not specified,
the current values of the TCP parameters, including the SMSS, are displayed.
A small SMSS causes the remote to reduce its segment size. tcp mss can reduce the MSS and
SMSS on bad network connections with high loss rates or where large packets get lost.
Example
tcp smss 512
tcp window sub-command
tcp window displays or sets the default and maximum receive window size.
When specified without the size parameter the current TCP parameters, including the current
window size, are displayed.
Example
tcp window 2920
tcp timemax sub-command
tcp timemax sets the maximum duration of a tcp retry. If a value greater than 255 seconds is
specified, connections will never timeout.
This is very useful in wireless applications where nodes roam in and out of service.
Example
tcp timemax 2000ms
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
154
MX3 Reference Guide
SOCKETS TCP/IP Stack
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
Problem Determination Tips
Use the tips in this chapter as a guide. They include solutions to the simplest problems as well as
things to observe when trying to diagnose more serious problems.
Consider the following:
•
If a problem occurs while you’re working, stop immediately. If you continue, you
may lose data and destroy problem-related information.
•
Observe what is happening. Write down what the MX3 and any optional devices are
doing as well as what actions you took immediately before the problem occurred.
•
Consider the simplest solution first. Ask yourself logical questions and consider
alternatives.
•
Which part of the system is operating erratically? Keypad? Disk/Flash Drive?
Barcode Scanner? Radio? Display? Each produces different symptoms.
•
What program and/or optional devices are you using?
•
What appears on the screen? Do you see any messages or random characters? Look
up any messages in the documentation for your software, (e.g. DOS, etc.)
•
Are any LEDs illuminated? Which ones?
•
Do you hear any beeps? How many? Are they long or short?
•
Is the MX3 making any unusual noises?
•
See if you can cause the problem to occur again. This may help you understand the
source of the problem and will help you describe the problem if you must call for
technical assistance.
•
Make sure you are operating under the specified environmental conditions discussed
in Chapter 3, “Power Supply” and Appendix C, “Technical Specifications”,
subsection “Environmental Specifications”.
Use the troubleshooting procedures that follow these tips and, if necessary, perform any
diagnostic procedures that may apply.
Based on the answers to the previous questions and suggestions, try to narrow the problem down
to one of the following areas:
•
Startup Problems
•
Hardware Problems - (i.e. power source, keypad, display, hard drive, PCMCIA
cards, optional devices, etc.)
•
Radio Problems
•
Software Related Problems
•
Memory
The following sections provide more detailed troubleshooting information about each of these
areas.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
156
Startup Problems
Startup Problems
This section lists some of the configuration error messages that may appear at system startup and
their possible solutions.
Note:
If you press the Power key and the MX3 remains off, refer to the “Power Source” section
of this chapter.
Problem
Solution
MX3 computer stops working
and locks up each time you start
it.
Your CONFIG.SYS or AUTOEXEC.BAT file might be
corrupt. To recover from this error, follow the steps in
the “Bypassing the Configuration Files” section of this
chapter.
The MX3 displays the “NonSystem disk or disk error”
message.
Make sure the MX3 is booting from the proper drive. To
recover from this error, follow the steps in the “Verifying
Boot Order” section of this chapter.
The MX3 displays the “Bad or
missing Command Interpreter”
message.
You’re missing the COMMAND.COM file, which
should be located in the root directory of the C drive. To
recover from this error, follow the steps in the “Missing
COMMAND.COM” section of this chapter.
The MX3 displays either “CMOS
time and date not set” or “Real
time clock failure” messages.
There may be a problem with the Backup Battery. Follow
the steps in the “Setting System Time and Date” section
of this chapter.
Bypassing the Configuration Files
If you are using DOS 6.0 or higher, you may want to bypass the configuration files and restore
configuration files from backup. To bypass the configuration files:
MX3 Reference Guide
1.
Turn on the MX3.
2.
When “Starting DOS” appears press the <F5> key.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Startup Problems
157
Verifying Boot Order
1.
During bootup, the <F2> key must be pressed to enter BIOS Setup. Turn on the
MX3. Press <F2>. (If Main Menu BIOS parameter Setup Msg is turned Off, the
“Press F2” message is not seen but the <F2> key function is still available.)
2.
At the BIOS Setup Main Menu, view the Boot parameter.
3.
If the Boot parameter is not already highlighted, press the <DownArrow> until it
is highlighted.
4.
Make sure the field entry is set to “C:”, if not press SP, and change the field
entry to “C:”.
5.
Press <Right Arrow> until you reach the Exit menu.
6.
Select “Save and Exit” to save the changes. Press <Enter>. If the MX3 does not
reboot automatically, reboot the MX3.
If the error continues please contact LXE Technical Support.
Missing COMMAND.COM
If the computer displays “Bad or missing Command Interpreter”, the computer is configured to
start from the hard disk and...
•
the COMMAND.COM file was accidentally deleted, or
•
the operating system can’t find the COMMAND.COM file (it may be in a directory
other than the root directory), or
•
an incompatible version of COMMAND.COM was copied over the
COMMAND.COM version supplied with the MX3.
To replace the command interpreter, follow these steps:
1.
Make sure the MX3 is powered off.
2.
Remove the endcap.
3.
Insert the DOS boot SRAM card into Slot 0, the right slot.
Note:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
You should have created a DOS boot SRAM when you received the
MX3.
4.
Power on the MX3.
5.
If you receive the “Bad or missing command interpreter” message continue with
step 6, otherwise go to step 12.
MX3 Reference Guide
158
Startup Problems
Edit BIOS Setup
MX3 Reference Guide
6.
During bootup the <F2> key must be pressed to enter BIOS Setup. You may
need to reboot.
7.
At the BIOS Setup Main Menu, view Boot parameter.
8.
If the Boot Sequence parameter is not already highlighted, press the
<DownArrow> until it is highlighted.
9.
Press SPC until the field entry is changed to “A: then C:”.
10.
Press <Right Arrow> until you reach the Exit menu.
11.
Select “Save and Exit” to save the changes. Press <Enter>.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Startup Problems
159
Copy File
12.
When the DOS prompt appears, type
SYS C:
and press <Enter>.
13.
Type
Type
C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT
and press <Enter>.
If your AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains a COMSPEC command, confirm that it
identifies the correct location for COMMAND.COM (i.e. the C:\ directory).
Please refer to commercially available DOS User’s Guides
for complete instructions or troubleshooting when using these
DOS files or commands.
14.
Type
Type
C:\CONFIG.SYS
and press <Enter>.
If your CONFIG.SYS file contains a SHELL command, confirm that it
identifies the correct location for COMMAND.COM (the C:\ directory).
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
15.
Power off the MX3.
16.
Remove the DOS boot SRAM card.
17.
Replace the PC card cover.
18.
Power on the MX3.
MX3 Reference Guide
160
Startup Problems
Setting System Time and Date
1.
If the MX3 is not already powered up, turn it on.
2.
During bootup the <F2> key must be pressed to enter BIOS Setup.
3.
At the BIOS Setup Main Menu, move the highlight to the Time parameter.
4.
Type the desired entry and then press the <Tab> key to move from hours to
minutes to seconds. The colons are automatically added by the system.
5.
Press the <DownArrow> to move to the Date parameter.
6.
Type the desired entry and then press the <Tab> key to move from month to
day to year. The backslashes are automatically added by the system.
7.
Press <Right Arrow> until you reach the Exit menu.
8.
Select “Save and Exit” to save the changes. Press <Enter>.
If the MX3 does not automatically reboot, turn the MX3 off and then on again.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Hardware Problems
161
Hardware Problems
This section lists possible solutions to some common problems with hardware.
Power Source
The MX3 receives power from an internal battery pack. The MX3’s battery can be recharged
while it is in a charging station (battery only) or docking stations (MX3 with battery).
Problem
Solution
The computer won’t start.
Make sure the main battery is installed and fully charged.
Power key will not turn the unit
off
Force a Power Off by holding the Power key down for 15
seconds. Locate and correct the problem before powering
the unit back on – e.g. IRQ conflict, very low battery
power, radio conflict, unexpected software application
result, etc.
If you cannot find the source of the problem, consult LXE Technical Support.
Keypad
The following table provides solutions to common keypad problems:
Problem
Solution
Get an unexpected character or
function when pressing some keys.
Make sure the correct keyboard and radio drivers are
loaded.
The keyboard locked and you
cannot use <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Del>
to reboot.
The Ctl+Alt+Del function may be disabled in BIOS
Setup. Use the Power key to reboot the MX3.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
162
Hardware Problems
Caution – Vehicle Mounting Brackets
Care must be taken to avoid bending or
warping the bottom “U” shaped bracket
when attaching the cradle to a lift truck
or other vehicle.
A bent “U” bracket can over-compress
or over-extend the rubber isolators
leading to failure of the isolators.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Hardware Problems
163
Display
For general display problems follow these guidelines.
Problem
Solution
Unable to read the display in
outdoor lighting.
Adjust the display contrast.
Hard Disk Drive
Note:
Primary storage is accomplished by an integrated flash circuit. BIOS software in the
MX3 provides an interface layer between the operating system and the hardware. To the
operating system (DOS) and the application software, the flash looks like a small hard
disk drive. The flash drive is still susceptible to many of the same problems as a hard
drive. If the computer is interrupted while writing data to a disk, the disk may become
corrupted. Interruptions include such things as power failure, user generated power
removal, user generated reboot or catastrophic software failure (crash).
If you have problems with the hard disk drive, run the DOS CHKDSK utility. CHKDSK analyzes
the directories, files and File Allocation Table (FAT) on the flash disk.
For information on running CHKDSK, refer to the DOS documentation.
If CHKDSK does not report any errors and the hard disk still has problems, contact LXE
Technical Support.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
164
Hardware Problems
PCMCIA Cards
Problem
Solution
You are having trouble accessing data
on a PCMCIA card or some of the
data appears to be missing.
Run the DOS CHKDSK command, which analyzes
the directories, files and the File Allocation Table
(FAT) on the card.
CHKDSK reports no errors and
you’re still experiencing problems.
Can you access the PCMCIA card? Try to view the
contents of the directory. For example, try using the
DOS DIR command. If the DIR command doesn’t
display all the files stored in the directory, recovering
data is unlikely.
SRAM card will not work.
PicoCard supports SRAM cards with the Phoenix
ATA driver PCMATA. Format the SRAM in another
computer and try again.
Data files are damaged or corrupted.
Refer to your software documentation for file recovery
procedures. Many software packages automatically
create backup files.
Receive message “Warning: conflict
with system COM”.
The COM port selected is already being used by
another device. If you know what COM ports are
available, you can edit the PCM.INI file and change
the COMORDER= number to an available COM port.
Note:
COM4 seems to be the best choice for PC
Cards.
Receive message “Invalid command
line switch”.
Command line switches are in the PCM.INI file, not
the CONFIG.SYS file.
Receive message “A previous version
of Card and Socket Services has been
detected. You must first remove this
version and rerun install.”
Run Deinstall to remove the older/other software.
DEINSTAL.EXE is a stand-alone DOS program.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Hardware Problems
165
Upper Memory Conflicts
Some drivers require an unused upper memory block. In this case, “unused” means that the upper
memory block 5 does not contain any ROM or RAM.
Driver
Memory Required
Default Address Range
PCMCS95.EXE
PCMATA.SYS
PCMFFCS.EXE
PCMFDD.EXE
4K
16K per SRAM card
4K to 64K
16K
C800-C8FF
C900
D000 - (dependent on variable size)
D000-D3FF
Available upper memory (C800 - DFFF) is crucial to using PCMCIA cards successfully. The
addresses shown above have the following characteristics:
•
The system has no RAM at these addresses.
•
The system has no ROM at these addresses.
•
Run a utility, such as MSD.EXE (not included with the MX3) which shows the
memory requested with ADDR= and /BASE= parameters listed as “available”.
IRQ Assignments
AT compatible systems have 16 IRQs, numbered 0 through 15, many of which are already
assigned as follows:
IRQs...................Device(s)
IRQ0 ...................Timer Output
IRQ1 ...................Keyboard
IRQ2 ...................Route to Interrupt Controller 2, IRQ8-IRQ15
IRQ3 ...................Serial Port COM2
IRQ4 ...................Serial Port COM1
IRQ5 ...................Reserved for PC Cards
IRQ6 ...................Floppy Disk Controller
IRQ7 ...................Power Management
IRQ8 ...................Real Time Clock
IRQ9 ...................Keyboard
IRQ10 .................PC Card Controller
IRQ11 .................Reserved for PC Cards
IRQ12 .................Touch Screen Data
IRQ13 .................80x87 Math Coprocessor
IRQ14 .................Hard Disk Controller
IRQ15 .................Some Hard Disk/SCSI Controllers (Default)
5
UMB is fully allocated in the MX3. Do not load drivers that require UMB or EMM386.EXE.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
166
Hardware Problems
Optional Devices
This section provides information on solving problems related to optional devices.
Note:
Make sure the MX3 is powered on before you turn on any powered optional devices.
To help determine which device is causing the problem:
•
Check that all connecting cables are correctly and firmly attached. Loose cables can
cause erroneous or intermittent signals. You may need to inspect connecting cables
for loose wires, and check connectors for loose pins.
•
Isolate the problem. Turn the computer off and remove all devices. Turn the
computer on and write down any error messages.
•
Turn the computer off. Add one optional device and turn the computer on again.
Continue this procedure of adding one device at a time until you resolve the
problem.
•
Device Configuration. The smooth operation of the system depends on the
interaction of all devices, programs and features.
Note:
Before you make any changes to your configuration files, make a copy of each
file (typically with a different extension, for example, copy AUTOEXEC.BAT to
AUTOEXEC.OLD). After you modify the configuration files, restart the
computer for the changes to take effect.
The following table provides some solutions to common configuration problems:
Problem
Solution
You connected a device and
the device isn’t operating
properly.
•
If you start programs or drivers from the configuration
files (CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT), remove the
commands that start those programs from the
configuration files and restart the computer.
•
Add the program commands back into the configuration
files one at a time until the problem reappears.
Experiment with the order of the programs. (Keep in
mind that some files must be loaded prior to others in
order for your system to operate properly. Check the
software documentation for any configuration
requirements.)
•
Make sure you chose the correct setting for the device in
the BIOS Setup utility.
•
You may have plugged in a device when the MX3 was
on. Turn the MX3 off, reconnect the device and turn the
MX3 on again.
•
The cable wiring may be faulty. Try a different cable or
check the device’s wiring requirements. Check all the
connections. Try operating the system again.
You connected an external
device and the computer
isn’t operating properly.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Radio Problems
167
Radio Problems
Problem:
The radio is on, configured properly and still won’t transmit or receive data.
Solution
Make sure the sending system is not busy or off-line.
The 2.4GHz Radios
Problem:
The Proxim 2.4GHz radio won’t receive or transmit properly.
Solution:
Check the settings in the NET.CFG or SOCKETS.CFG files (i.e.
communications parameters: station type, Domain, etc.) Refer to Chapter 6, “RF
Network Configuration” for information on how to modify these settings.
Problem:
The Lucent 2.4GHz radio won’t connect to the network even though everything
else seems to be working properly.
Solution:
Check WaveLAN/IEEE Advanced Setup configuration for the Access Point and
to see if you have configured the wireless network as a “Closed System”. If this
is the case then the WaveLAN Network Name on the station must match what is
configured in the Access Point.
- or The string for WaveLAN_Network_Name is case-sensitive. The WaveLAN
DOS ODI driver requires the use of only UPPER-CASE characters. If you have
configured the Access Points with lower-case names you will need to change
your Access Point WaveLAN_Network_Name parameter to UPPER-CASE
characters for proper operation.
The 900MHz Radios
Problem:
The 900MHz radio won’t receive or transmit properly.
Solution:
Refer to the appropriate Terminal Emulation Reference Guide for information
on how to modify RF parameters for the 900MHz PCMCIA radio.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
168
Software Related Problems
Software Related Problems
Consider the following:
•
If an error message appears while you are using a software package, check the
software documentation first. It usually includes a troubleshooting section or
summary of error messages. If you cannot find the error message in the software
documentation, look for the message in the ROM-DOS documentation.
•
If you cannot load a software package, the SRAM card (or diskette if using
REMSERVE.EXE) may be corrupt, try another card/disk. If you have received a bad
disk/SRAM card call the manufacturer for a new one.
•
Some software may be incompatible with other software already installed. If the
problem continues, contact the manufacturer of the software program.
•
Some software may require more time than the Video Timer parameter maximum
value (15 minutes) to install. In this case, press an arrow key or the spacebar to keep
the MX3 “awake” until the software installation is complete.
•
Be sure you have enough memory and hard disk space to handle the software being
installed.
FTP Kernel
If you cannot connect to the network or if you do not have any success using XPING try the
following:
MX3 Reference Guide
1.
Ensure that you have restarted your system, after making changes to any
configuration files. Changes to your configuration files will not take effect until
you restart your system.
2.
Verify that you have a valid entry in the SOCKET.CFG file for IP addresses.
3.
Ensure that network driver parameters and configuration files, such as
NET.CFG, have the correct entries.
4.
Verify that your system files (AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS) have the
correct entries. Refer to Chapter 4, “System Configuration”, for the correct
parameters for AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Memory
169
Convert MX3 from MS-DOS to ROM-DOS
This section is contained in this manual to assist the System Administrator when upgrading
existing MS-DOS units to ROM-DOS units. MX3s received from LXE after March 2001 do not
require ROM-DOS upgrades.
From the ROM-DOS directory create a bootable 1M SRAM or bootable ATA card.
1.
Type the following at the DOS prompt, assuming the SRAM card is located in Drive D:
2.
Sys d:
3.
Copy the following ROM-DOS files to the SRAM card by typing at the DOS prompt:
4.
Copy sys.com d:
5.
Copy format.com d:
6.
Insert the SRAM card in the MX3’s PC slot and edit BIOS Setup to allow bootup from the
SRAM card.
7.
Reboot the MX3 and format the unit by typing the following at the DOS prompt:
8.
format c: /s /u
Memory
This section lists possible solutions to some common memory problems.
Conventional Memory
If your program reports that there isn’t enough memory for it to run, you may not have enough
conventional memory available for that program. To determine the memory needs of the program
and the availability of memory in the MX3, follow these steps:
1.
Check the software documentation to see what kind of memory the program can use
(conventional, extended or expanded) 6.
2.
At the system prompt, type MEM to run the DOS MEM command and check how much
conventional memory is left for your programs. (MEM reports the number of bytes available.)
3.
Refer to the program’s documentation to verify that this is enough memory to run the
program. If not, you may need to remove device drivers or memory-resident programs from
the CONFIG.SYS or AUTOEXEC.BAT files. (If unsure of how to accomplish this, contact
LXE Technical Support.)
When you start the computer and it displays an error during the memory test, write down the error
and call LXE Technical Support.
Extended Memory
To use software with extended memory, the software must be compatible with the Extended
Memory Specification (XMS).
6
UMB is fully allocated in the MX3. Do not load drivers that require UMB or EMM386.EXE.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
170
Power On Self Test (POST)
Power On Self Test (POST)
Each time the MX3 is turned on (or is rebooted using <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Del>), a series of
comprehensive hardware tests are performed. These tests are called the Power On Self Test, or
POST.
In the event that the system does not complete the POST, a beep code will sound. If this happens,
contact LXE Customer Support.
If the LXE MX3 display is operational and the unit appears to boot when you turn it on, yet
behaves in a manner that leads you to believe it is not working properly, refer to Chapter 7,
“Troubleshooting”. If the unit still operates erratically, contact LXE Customer Support (refer to
“Getting Help” section in Chapter 1, “Introduction”). You may need to return the MX3 for
service.
POST Error Messages
The following table lists the POST error messages for the MX3. If problems persist, contact LXE
Customer Support (refer to “Getting Help” section in Chapter 1, “Introduction”).
Message
System CMOS checksum bad – run SETUP
Possible Cause
The backup battery may be completely drained.
Action
Insert a new battery pack. The battery pack will begin charging the backup battery. Wait until the
BB LED goes off. Turn the power off, then back on again. If the problem persists, contact LXE
Customer Support.
Message
Stuck Key
Possible Cause
A keypad key may be stuck in the down position.
Action
Check the keypad for a physically stuck key and loosen the key. Turn the power off, then back on
again. If the problem persists, contact LXE Customer Support.
Message
Previous boot incomplete – Default configuration used
Action
Run BIOS Setup to recall the previously saved settings. Turn the power off, then back on again. If
the problem persists, contact LXE Customer Support.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Power On Self Test (POST)
171
Messages Probably Requiring Repair
Message
Operating system not found
Keyboard error
K System RAM Failed at offset:
K Shadow Ram Failed at offset:
K Extended RAM Failed at offset:
System cache error - Cache disabled
System timer error
Real time clock error
Keyboard controller error
Action
Turn the power off, then back on again. If the problem persists, contact LXE Customer Support
for repair instruction.
POST Beep Codes
The system speaker emits a coded beep to alert the user that the system failed the Power On Self
Test. If this happens, contact qualified service personnel. Do not attempt to fix the problem
yourself.
Beep codes are listed below with a short description of the error.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Beep Seq.
Description
1-2-2-3
BIOS ROM Checksum Failure
1-3-1-1
DRAM Refresh Failure
1-3-1-3
Keyboard Controller Failure
1-3-4-1
512KB Base Address Line Failure
1-3-4-3
512KB Base Memory Failure
2-1-2-3
ROM Copyright Notice Error
2-2-3-1
Unexpected Interrupt
MX3 Reference Guide
172
If You Need Further Assistance
If You Need Further Assistance
If you have followed these recommendations and are still having problems, you may need
additional technical assistance. This section contains the steps to take as you prepare to ask for
help.
Before You Call
Since some problems you experience may be related to the operating system or software, it is
important to investigate other sources of assistance first. Try the following before contacting LXE.
MX3 Reference Guide
•
Review the troubleshooting information in commercially available DOS
documentation.
•
If the problem occurs while running software applications loaded after your
purchase of the MX3, consult the software documentation for troubleshooting
suggestions. Contact the software company’s technical support department for
assistance.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Appendix A Key Maps
Keypads
Figure A-1 ABCD Keypad and QWERTY Keypad
The key maps that follow represent the commands used with batch units and when running LXE’s
ANSI Plus (with either 900MHz or 2.4GHz radios) or LDS Plus (with 900MHz radios) Terminal
Emulation (TE) programs. When running these programs on the MX3, please refer to the
following terminal emulation reference guides for equivalent keys and keypress sequences:
Note:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
•
ANSI Plus Reference Guide
•
LDS Plus Reference Guide
900MHz radios are obsolete.
MX3 Reference Guide
174
Keypads
Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies for Batch Units
Note:
The batch unit key mapping is used on mobile computers that are NOT running an LXE
Terminal Emulator.
When using a sequence of keys that includes the 2nd key, press the 2nd key first then the rest of the
key sequence. Set the On/Off condition of NumLock before pressing a key sequence. There is no
visual indication of the condition of NumLock.
Note:
When the computer boots, the default condition of NumLock is On. NumLock can be set
using BIOS Setup.
Note:
When the computer boots, the default condition of Caps (or CapsLock) is Off. The Caps
(or CapsLock) condition can be set using BIOS Setup or toggled with a 2nd-F1 key
sequence. The CAPS LED is illuminated when CapsLock is On.
To get this key
Press These Keys and Then
nd
2
Shift
Ctrl
Press this key
CapsLock
Contrast
x
F6
Volume
x
F8
Backlight
x
F10
nd
2nd
2
Shift
Shft
Alt
Alt
Ctrl
Ctrl
Scan 7
Scan
Esc
Esc
Space
Spc
Enter
Enter
Enter (numeric)
x
CapsLock (Toggle)
x
x
Enter
F1
Back Space
BkSp
Tab
7
Alt
Tab
BackTab
x
Tab
Break
x
F2
Pause
x
x
F3
Up Arrow
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Down Arrow
Right Arrow
Right Arrow
Left Arrow
Left Arrow
Insert
x
BkSp
Delete
x
DOT
Home
x
Left Arrow
Left Scan key default value is Numeric Enter.
Right Scan key default value is Scan.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Keypads
175
To get this key
Press These Keys and Then
nd
2
End
Shift
Ctrl
Alt
Press this key
CapsLock
x
Right Arrow
Page Up
x
Up Arrow
Page Down
x
Down Arrow
Right Shift
x
x
F7
Right Alt
x
x
F8
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Right Ctrl
x
x
F9
ScrollLock
x
x
F4
PrintScrn
x
x
F6
SysReq
x
x
F5
F1
F1
F2
F2
F3
F3
F4
F4
F5
F5
F6
F6
F7
F7
F8
F8
F9
F9
F10
F10
F11
x
x
F1
F12
x
x
F2
a
x
A
b
x
B
c
x
C
d
x
D
e
x
E
f
x
F
g
x
G
h
x
H
i
x
I
j
x
J
k
x
K
l
x
L
m
x
M
n
x
N
o
x
O
p
x
P
q
x
Q
r
x
R
s
x
S
MX3 Reference Guide
176
Keypads
To get this key
Press These Keys and Then
nd
2
MX3 Reference Guide
Shift
Ctrl
Alt
Press this key
CapsLock
t
x
T
u
x
U
v
x
V
w
x
W
x
x
X
y
x
Y
z
x
Z
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
F
G
G
H
H
I
I
J
J
K
K
L
L
M
M
N
N
O
O
P
P
Q
Q
R
R
S
S
T
T
U
U
V
V
W
W
X
X
Y
Y
Z
Z
1 (alpha)
x
x
1
2 (alpha)
x
x
2
3 (alpha)
x
x
3
4 (alpha)
x
x
4
5 (alpha)
x
x
5
6 (alpha)
x
x
6
7 (alpha)
x
x
7
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Keypads
177
To get this key
Press These Keys and Then
nd
2
Shift
Ctrl
Alt
Press this key
CapsLock
8 (alpha)
x
x
8
9 (alpha)
x
x
9
0 (alpha)
x
x
0
DOT (alpha)
x
K
1 (numeric)
1
2 (numeric)
2
3 (numeric)
3
4 (numeric)
4
5 (numeric)
5
6 (numeric)
6
7 (numeric)
7
8 (numeric)
8
9 (numeric)
9
0 (numeric)
0
DOT (numeric)
DOT
<
x
0
[
x
1
]
x
2
>
x
3
=
x
4
{
x
5
}
x
6
/ (numeric)
x
/ (alpha)
x
x
7
7
- (numeric)
x
- (minus sign)
x
x
8
- (alpha)
x
8
+ (numeric)
x
x
8
9
+ (alpha)
x
9
* (numeric)
x
I
* (alpha)
x
: (colon)
x
D
; (semicolon)
x
F
?
x
L
`
x
N
_ (underscore)
x
M
, (comma)
x
J
‘ (apostrophe)
x
H
~ (tilde)
x
B
\
x
S
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
x
I
MX3 Reference Guide
178
Keypads
To get this key
Press These Keys and Then
nd
2
|
MX3 Reference Guide
x
Shift
Ctrl
Alt
Press this key
CapsLock
A
“
x
G
!
x
Q
@
x
W
#
x
E
$
x
R
%
x
T
^
x
Y
&
x
U
(
x
O
)
x
P
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Keypads
179
IBM 3270 and TN3270 Terminal Emulator Keypad
Figure A-2 IBM 3270 Specific Keypad
This QWERTY keypad is designed to allow the user to enter terminal emulator commands when
running LXE’s IBM 3270 and TN3270 Terminal Emulation (TE) programs. The MX3’s ABCD
keypad is not available for these terminal emulations.
When running these programs on the MX3, please refer to the following terminal emulation
reference guides for equivalent keys and keypress sequences:
•
3270 DOS TE Reference Guide (Obsolete)
•
3270 Programmer’s Reference Guide (Obsolete)
•
TN3270 Terminal Reference Guide
IBM 5250 and TN5250 Terminal Emulator Keypad
Figure A-3 IBM 5250 Specific Keypad
This QWERTY keypad is designed to allow the user to enter terminal emulator commands when
running LXE’s IBM 5250 and TN5250 Terminal Emulation (TE) programs. The MX3’s ABCD
keypad is not available for these terminal emulations.
When running these programs on the MX3, please refer to the following terminal emulation
reference guides for equivalent keys and keypress sequences:
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
•
5250 DOS TE Reference Guide (Obsolete)
•
5250 Programmer’s Reference Guide (Obsolete)
•
TN5250 Terminal Reference Guide
MX3 Reference Guide
180
MX3 Reference Guide
Keypads
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Appendix B Technical Specifications
Physical Specifications
Features
Specifications
Comments
CPU
Intel 486SX 25 MHz
32 bit CPU (with on-chip
cache)
Memory
Display
ROM
1MB BIOS Flash
RAM
4 MB Dynamic RAM
System Memory
Controller
VGA Compatible Controller
512 KB of Video RAM
LCD
Monochrome Transflective
w/optional Touchscreen
Transflective LCD
Customer Configurable
Backlighting
Touchscreen - LXE
Installed Option
Mass
Storage
Flash
4 MB
Drive C:
Removable
PC Card
(Customer
Installable)
SRAM or Flash PCMCIA Type II PC
Cards (Various Sizes)
Configurable as Drive D:
and E:
SRAM PC card Boots as
Drive A:
Others boot as Drive C:
Bootable SRAM PC Card, ATA Flash
PC Card, or ATA Hard Drive PC Card
Solid State Disk and ATA Rotating
Hard Drive PCMCIA Type III Drive
(Various Sizes)
Configurable as Drive D:
and E:
PCMCIA Interface
Two (2) PCMCIA Slots:
Slot 1 accepts Type I, II, and III
Slot 0 accepts Type I and II
Compatible with the
PCMCIA version 2.1
standard.
Weights
Unit with radio, battery and SE 923
scanner endcap
Less than
30 oz
>850g
Battery
5.6 oz
157g
Radio Card
2.4GHz Type II
900MHz
1.0 oz
1.6 oz
28g
45g
SRAM Card
1 oz
28g
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
182
Physical Specifications
Features
Specifications
Comments
External
Connectors/Interface
IrDA Connector (COM 2) bidirectional half-duplex
Supports 115k baud
(IrDA software restricts to
19.2k baud)
Endcap - Dual Serial, DB-9 Connector
(COM 1 and COM 2)
9 Pin “D” (male)
Connector. Provides
connection to external
devices such as a printer.
Endcap - includes SE923 Scanner,
DB-9 Connector (COM 1)
9 Pin “D” (male)
Connector. Provides
connection to external
devices such as a printer.
8.5V - 15 VDC Input Power
External Battery Charger
Contacts
10.8 - 16VDC Input Power
Power Jack
Length
6.5”
165 cm
Width
9”
228 cm
Depth
1.5”
38 cm
Main
10.8V, 3 cell, Li-Ion battery pack
In-Unit Chargeable or
Externally Chargeable
Backup
(CMOS)
Internal Nickel-Cadmium (NiCd)
5.7V max.
Automatically charges
from Main Battery during
normal operation
Power Connector
Dimensions w/Endcap
Batteries
Keeps MX3 operational
for 5 minutes (depending
upon usage) when Main
Battery is depleted
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Environmental Specifications
183
Environmental Specifications
LXE MX3 and Endcaps
Feature
Specification
Operating Temperature
-4°F to 122°F (-20°C to 50°C)
Storage Temperature
-22°F to 140°F (-30°C to 60°C)
Water
IEC IP55 (with standard endcaps)
MX3 - Sand and Dust
IEC IP55 (with standard endcaps)
Endcaps - Water and Dust
IEC IP56 (with standard endcaps)
Operating Humidity
Up to 90% non-condensing at 104°F (40°C)
Vibration
Based on MIL Std 810D
ESD
8 KV air, 4kV direct contact
Shock
Multiple 4 foot drops to concrete
6 foot with protective cover
Power Supplies
US AC Wall Adapter
Feature
Specification
Input Power Switch
None
Power “ON” Indicator
None
Input Fusing
Thermal Fuse
Input Voltage
108VAC min - 132VAC max
Input Frequency
47 - 63 Hz
Input Connector
North American wall plug, no ground
Output Connector
Barrel connector, female, 5.5 x 2.5 x 11.5mm, Center Positive
Output Voltage
+12VDC, unregulated
Output Current
0 Amps min, 1.5 A max
Operating Temperature
32° F to 104° F / 0° C to 40° C
Storage Temperature
-13° F to 158° F / -25° C to 70° C
Humidity
Operates in a relative humidity of:
5 – 95% (non-condensing)
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
184
Display Specifications
International AC Adapter
Feature
Specification
Operating Temperature
32°F to 104°F (-0°C to 40°C)
Storage Temperature
-13°F to 158°F (-25°C to 70°C)
Operating Humidity
Up to 90% non-condensing at 104°F (40°C)
Input Power Switch
None
Power “ON” Indicator
None
Input Voltage
108VAC min - 264VAC max
Input Frequency
47 - 63 Hz
Input Connector
Customer supplied
Output Connector
Barrel connector, female, 5.5 x 2.5 x 11mm, Center Positive
Output Voltage
+12VDC, regulated
Output Voltage Regulation
+/- 5%
Output Current
0 Amps min, 1.00 Amps max
Display Specifications
Feature
Specification
Comments
Type
Transflective Monochrome LCD
Electroluminescent
Backlighting
Resolution
640x240 pixels
30 lines x 80 characters
15 lines x 80 characters
Cell Size
DOS Mode
8x8
8 x 16
Size
½ VGA
Diagonal Viewing Area
5.92 in (150.4mm)
Dot Pitch
0.22mm
Dot Size
0.20mm x 0.20mm
Gray Scale
16 Shades of Gray
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Radio Specifications
185
Radio Specifications
PCMCIA 900 MHz Type III
Bus Interface:
PCMCIA 2.0, Type III slot
Radio Frequencies:
902.2 MHz to 927.8 MHz FH SS
RF Data Rates:
64K bits/sec CPFSK
RF Power Output:
250 mW ± 2.0 dB into 50 Ohms (varies by country)
Channel Spacing:
400 KHz or 200 KHz
Operating Temperature MX3
-20°C to +50°C, -4°F to 122°F
Storage Temperature MX3
-40°C to 70°C, -40°F to 158°F
Connectivity:
Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, NDIS, ODI
Antenna
Internal
LXE 6400 PCMCIA 2.4 GHz Type II
Bus Interface:
PCMCIA 2.0, Type II slot
Radio Frequencies:
2.4 - 2.4835 GHz FH SS
RF Data Rates:
0.8 / 1.6 Mbps
RF Power Level:
100 mW (varies by country)
Channels
15
Operating Temperature
see MX3 Environmental Specs
Storage Temperature
see MX3 Environmental Specs
Connectivity:
Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, NDIS, ODI
Antenna
Internal
LXE 6500 PCMCIA 2.4 GHz Type II
Bus Interface:
PCMCIA 2.0, Type II slot
Radio Frequencies:
2.4 - 2.4835 GHz IEEE 802.11b DS SS
RF Data Rates:
1 / 2 Mbps
RF Power Level:
15 dBm nominal (varies by country)
Channels
11 US, 13 Europe, 4 France, 14 Japan
Operating Temperature
see MX3 Environmental Specs
Storage Temperature
see MX3 Environmental Specs
Connectivity:
Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI
Antenna
Internal
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
186
Radio Specifications
PCMCIA Cisco 2.4 GHz Type II
Bus Interface:
PCMCIA 2.0, Type II slot
Radio Frequencies:
2.4 - 2.4835 GHz IEEE 802.11b DS SS
RF Data Rates:
11 Mbps maximum
RF Power Level:
35 mW nominal
Channels
11 US, 13 Europe, 4 France, 1 Japan
Operating Temperature
see MX3 Environmental Specs
Storage Temperature
see MX3 Environmental Specs
Connectivity:
Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI
Antenna
Internal
PCMCIA Symbol 2Mb 2.4 GHz Type II
Bus Interface:
PCMCIA 2.0, Type II slot
Radio Frequencies:
2.4 - 2.5 GHz FH SS
RF Data Rates:
2 Mbps maximum
RF Power Level:
100 mW
Channels
15
Operating Temperature
see MX3 Environmental Specs
Storage Temperature
see MX3 Environmental Specs
Connectivity:
Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, NDIS, ODI
Antenna
Internal
PCMCIA Symbol 11Mb 2.4 GHz Type II
Bus Interface:
PCMCIA 2.0, Type II slot
Radio Frequencies:
2.4 - 2.5 GHz IEEE 802.11b DS SS
RF Data Rates:
11 Mbps maximum
RF Power Level:
100 mW
Channels
11 US, 13 Europe, 4 France, 1 Japan
Operating Temperature
see MX3 Environmental Specs
Storage Temperature
see MX3 Environmental Specs
Connectivity:
Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI
Antenna
Internal
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Appendix C Commands
Introduction
This appendix describes the Datalight ROM-DOS commands that are loaded in the MX3 by LXE.
The information in this appendix is taken from Datalight’s “ROM-DOS 6.22 User’s Guide” and is
used by permission.
ROM-DOS Commands
Each entry includes an explanation of the command’s purpose, the command entry syntax,
remarks, and examples. Where applicable, command syntax and parameters are given. Parameters
may be supplied using either uppercase or lowercase letters, and the hyphen (-) may be substituted
for the forward slash (/).
Each command also has a label to designate whether it is an internal or external command.
Internal commands are part of the command processor program, COMMAND.COM. These
functions are available only while COMMAND.COM is running. External commands are actually
stand-alone utility programs. They are independent from COMMAND.COM.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
188
ROM-DOS Commands
ANSI.SYS
Type
Installable Device Driver
Purpose
ANSI.SYS is a console device driver that allows you to support ANSI codes on the local display.
Syntax
Device=ANSI.SYS [options]
Remarks
ANSI.SYS supports standard ANSI escape sequences.
ANSI.SYS writes directly the screen when using text video mode.
Options
The /K option forces use of the extended keyboard BIOS calls which sense F11 and F12.
The /X option lets you redefine the extended keys independently.
The /S option disables the keyboard redefinition feature.
The /Tnn option indicates that the video mode nn is a text mode. By default, modes 0, 1, 2, 3 and
7 are text modes.
Examples
DEVICE=ANSI.SYS
This example loads ANSI.SYS with default settings.
DEVICE=ANSI.SYS /T54 /S
Load ANSI.SYS with mode 54h as a video text mode and disable keyboard redefinition.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
ROM-DOS Commands
189
ATTRIB.EXE
Type
External
Purpose
The ATTRIB command either displays or modifies the attribute of a file.
Syntax
ATTRIB [+ ¦ -][option][filespec]
Remarks
The file attributes define the characteristics of a file. They determine if a file may be deleted or
modified, or if it is archived. The ATTRIB command is used to manage these file attributes.
Wildcard characters may be used in the ATTRIB filespec.
The ATTRIB command will modify file attributes if modify commands are given to ATTRIB.
The modify commands are:
Command
+/A
C
H
R
S
Description
Add(+) or remove(-) attribute
Archive attribute
Clear all attributes
Hidden file attribute
Read only attribute
System file attribute
If no modify commands are found by ATTRIB, then the files are displayed along with the file
names and their current attributes.
Examples
ATTRIB will add the read-only attribute to the file myfile.dat.
ATTRIB +r myfile.dat
ATTRIB will remove the read-only attribute and the archive attribute for all files with the DAT
extension.
ATTRIB -a -r *.dat
ATTRIB will display the attributes of all files with the DAT extension.
ATTRIB *.dat
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
190
ROM-DOS Commands
CHKDSK.EXE
Type
External
Purpose
The CHKDSK command checks the disk directories and File Allocation Table (FAT) and displays
a disk and memory report.
Syntax
CHKDSK [d:][path][filespec][/C] [/F] [/V]
Remarks
CHKDSK examines a disk and determines if the disk has any errors in the File Allocation Table
(FAT) and will optionally fix errors.
Options
The /F option causes CHKDSK to fix errors on the disk if any were found. The errors that can be
found are directory or FAT errors. If the /F is not specified then CHKDSK acts as if it will fix the
disk, but the corrections will not be written out to the disk.
If errors are detected, you will be prompted with a message similar to the following:
15 lost allocation units found in 5 chains.
Convert lost chains to files?
If you answer Y for Yes, each lost chain will be written to a file in the root directory of the current
default drive. Each file will have the name filennnn.chk. nnnn will be a sequential number. The
first chain will be in FILE000.CHK. These files can be verified to see if they contain valuable
information, and then deleted if desired. Answering N for No to the above prompt, CHKDSK will
still make the corrections however the lost chains will not be saved to the disk.
The /C option allows CHKDSK to correct errors without user confirmation. This option must be
used along with the /F option for corrections to be made.
The /V option causes CHKDSK to display each path and file as it is processed.
If a file specification is specified, then CHKDSK displays all files matching the specification that
have noncontiguous data areas on the disk. Files that are stored in noncontiguous areas, especially
.exe files, have slower disk access times. If CHKDSK reports a large number of files with this
problem, a utility program that optimizes the files and free space on your disk should be used.
After checking the disk, CHKDSK displays any error messages followed by a report on the state
of the disk that was checked. An example of the report is shown below.
Volume ROM-DOS created June 1,1990 1:00a
Volume Serial Number is 190E-4AA2
362496 bytes total disk space
0 bytes in 1 hidden files
6144 bytes in 2 user files
356352 bytes available on disk
655360 bytes total memory
595360 bytes free
CHKDSK does not wait for a disk to be inserted before the checking is initiated nor does it repair
any errors.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
ROM-DOS Commands
191
Examples
CHKDSK will check the integrity of drive A. The report will be printed to the console.
CHKDSK a:
CHKDSK will check the integrity of RAM disk D. The report will be saved in a file called
DRIVE_D.RPT.
CHKDSK d: >drive_d.rpt
COMMAND.COM
Type
External
Purpose
Start a new command processor.
Syntax
COMMAND[device][/E:number][/K:filename]
[/P][/C string][/MSG]
Remarks
This command starts a new copy of the ROM-DOS command processor. The command processor
is the program that has all the internal DOS commands in it.
Starting a new command processor will also produce a new environment. The size of the
environment is 128 bytes by default, but it can be changed using the /E switch.
Command and its arguments can also be used in a SHELL= statement in your config.sys file. See
the full description of SHELL for more details.
Options
The device option specifies that COMMAND.COM should use a different device, such as AUX,
for input and output.
The /E:number switch sets the environment size. Number represents the size of the environment
in bytes. Number must be in the range from 160 to 32768. All other values will be ignored and the
default value of 256 will be used. ROM-DOS will round the value entered up to the nearest
multiple of 16.
The /K:filename option tells the command processor to run the specified filename and then display
the ROM-DOS command prompt. It is not recommended that this option be used in a
CONFIG.SYS SHELL= statement.
The /P switch causes COMMAND not to exit, or in other words, to remain permanent. The /P
switch should be used only when command is used in a CONFIG.SYS SHELL statement.
The /c string switch causes COMMAND to execute the command in string and then terminate.
The string command can be any internal or external command.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
192
ROM-DOS Commands
The /MSG option indicates that all error messages should be stored in memory. This option is
recommended only for diskette based systems. ROM-DOS keeps many of its error messages in the
resident part of COMMAND.COM rather than using valuable memory to store them. If an error
message is needed and you have loaded ROM-DOS from a diskette, the message will only be
available if the boot disk is still in the drive. By using the /MSG option, the messages will be
available in memory at all times. The /P option must be used along with the /MSG option.
Examples
The following command will cause a new copy of COMMAND to be executed. It will perform a
DIR command on the C drive and then exit back to the previous Command Processor.
COMMAND /C DIR C:
The following example shows loading of a permanent copy of command with an environment size
of 256 bytes.
SHELL=C:\COMMAND.COM /P /E:256
DELTREE.EXE
External Command
The DELTREE command deletes one or more directory trees or individual files.
Syntax
DELTREE [/Y] [drive:]path [[drive:]path[...]]
Remarks
/Y prevents DELTREE from prompting before deleting.
[drive:]path indicates the name(s) of the file(s) or directory tree(s) to delete. Wildcards are
allowed.
Examples
Datalight DELTREE deletes one or more directory trees. For example, to delete all files and
directories in the tree C:\TEMP, enter
DELTREE C:\TEMP.
You can also use DELTREE to delete individual files, one at a time, using wildcards. For
example, to delete selected files in the current directory, enter
DELTREE *.*
DELTREE then prompts you for each file it finds, allowing you to choose whether to delete them.
Caution:
MX3 Reference Guide
Take care when using wildcards with DELTREE. DELTREE deletes all specified
files and subdirectories regardless of their attributes. Multiple files and/or
subdirectories may be specified.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
ROM-DOS Commands
193
FORMAT.COM
External Command
The FORMAT command initializes a disk so ROM-DOS can access files on that disk. A disk
must be formatted before ROM-DOS can use it.
Syntax
FORMAT [drive:] [/options]
Remarks
FORMAT initializes the disk and directory of the specified drive. The size of the formatted disk is
the largest possible size that the specified drive supports, unless a different size is specified via a
command line option.
Options
The /4 switch causes the floppy disk to be formatted as a 360KB disk even if the drive is a
1.44MB, 2.88MB, or 1.2MB drive.
The /7 switch causes the floppy disk to be formatted as a 720KB disk even if the drive is a
1.44MB or 2.88MB drive.
The /B option causes FORMAT to used BIOS Int 13h calls. By default, FORMAT checks the
DOS version, and if it is DOS 5.0 or higher, it uses the floppy device driver to do the format.
Using the /B option forces FORMAT to bypass the floppy or hard disk controller and use BIOS
calls. /B makes FORMAT device independent.
The /C switch causes FORMAT to format one disk without user input. The disk is assumed to be
in the specified drive, and FORMAT exits immediately when the format is complete. This switch
is useful in batch files or programs that require a formatted disk without user input.
The /F:size option specifies the size of the floppy disk to be formatted. Available size values are
360, 720, 1.2, 1.44, and 2.88, and are entered as /F:size. For example, /F:1.2.
The /H switch causes the system files not to be hidden or write-protected. This can be used along
with the /S option.
The /I option forces FORMAT to use IOCTL calls and never use BIOS calls. Normally,
FORMAT first tries to access the device driver IOCTL calls to format the disk. If this fails, BIOS
calls are used (unless the /B option is specified). BIOS calls are always used for DOS 3.3 and
earlier.
The /Q option causes FORMAT to do a quick format. A quick format reinitializes the disk,
deleting each file and subdirectory from the disk. A quick format can only be performed on a
previously fully formatted disk.
The /S switch causes FORMAT to copy the ROM-DOS system files, ROM-DOS.SYS and
COMMAND.COM, onto the disk. The file ROM-DOS.SYS is renamed and stored on the disk as
files IBMBIO.COM and IBMDOS.COM, which are stored as hidden files, unless the /H option is
used.
The /V:LABEL switch causes FORMAT to place a volume label on the disk. If the volume label is
not provided on the command line, you are prompted for the volume label once the format is
complete.
The /[ switch causes FORMAT to run without display of the sign-on message.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
194
ROM-DOS Commands
If FORMAT encounters an error, the exit code returned to DOS indicates the type of error. The
error codes are listed in the following table.
Error Level
0
1
2
3
4
Type of Error
No error encountered
Invalid drive
Unsupported drive format
Attempted hard drive format (unsupported)
Write-protect error
HIMEM.SYS
Installable Device Driver
The HIMEM.SYS device driver manages extended memory and the High Memory Area (HMA)
in a 286, 386 or greater, or PS/2 systems. HIMEM prevents programs from simultaneously using
the same area of memory for two different purposes. HIMEM supports the Extended Memory
Specification (XMS) 2.0. HIMEM is installed as a device driver in CONFIG.SYS.
Syntax
DEVICE = [d:] [path] HIMEM.SYS [/machine:n] [/A20[+]] [/PS2]
[/CONTROLA20:OFF]
Remarks
The HIMEM driver can be used to allow ROM-DOS to run in High Memory.
HIMEM supports a default of 32 handles.
HIMEM should not be used with older versions of Datalight’s VDISK. Current versions of
VDISK use XMS memory if it is available.
HIMEM recognizes PS/2-style A20 line control and determines whether to use the PS/2 A20
control or the AT A20 control method automatically by calling Int 15h, function C0h (get system
configuration). This automatic detection can be overridden with the /Machine:n, /A20, A20+, or
/PS2 command line switches in the event that the auto detection on a given system fails.
/Machine:1 and /A20 both designate the PC AT A20 control method. These switches instruct
HIMEM not to wait for the A20 line to settle.
/Machine:2 and /PS2 both designate the PS/2 control method.
/A20+ is similar to /A20 but instructs HIMEM to wait for the A20 line to settle.
/Machine:3 designates support for the Phoenix Cascade BIOS A20 control methods.
Alternately, /CONTROLA20:OFF instructs HIMEM to not detect the control method for the A20
line and assumes the A20 line is always on.
The /BIOS switch forces the use of BIOS Int15h, Function 87h, for data transfers to and from
XMS memory.
The /QUIET switch forces HIMEM to remove the sign-on message when loading.
Error Conditions
No Extended Memory—An extended memory error condition can occur if the BIOS (via Int
15H, function 88H) notifies HIMEM that there is no extended memory. In this situation, HIMEM
displays an appropriate error message and does not install.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
ROM-DOS Commands
195
Failure to Control the A20 Line—When HIMEM installs, it attempts to control the A20 line,
which controls access to the HMA. HIMEM first attempts control via the AT method (using the
8259 keyboard control). If that fails, HIMEM then attempts control via the PS/2 method (using
I/O port 60H). If both methods fail, HIMEM assumes it can’t control the A20 line and displays the
message
A20 Control (OFF)
If either of these errors occur, try using the /A20, /A20+, or /PS2 in the HIMEM command line.
Note also that some older programs assume that the machine is a 1MB 8086 and so require that
the A20 line to be disabled (OFF) while they run. Current programs typically do not require that
the A20 line be disabled.
Examples
Device = HIMEM.SYS
Installs the XMS device driver. Once this driver is installed, accessing the HMA and Extended
Memory (XMS) memory areas are legal. The Extended Memory area can contain up to 2GB of
memory. Typical systems have 4, 8, or 16MB of XMS memory installed.
Device = HIMEM.SYS /machine:1
Forces the use of the AT-style A20 line control.
The HIMEM driver fails to load when either the machine does not have memory above the 1MB
boundary or the BIOS does not provide support for it. It also fails to load when another XMS
manager has been previously installed.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
196
ROM-DOS Commands
MEM.EXE
External Command
The MEM command displays the used and free memory in your system.
Syntax
MEM [/BiosExtensions] [/Classify] [/Raw]
Remarks
Options
Description
/B
Displays each BIOS extension and its size.
/C
Classifies the memory usage.
/R
Does raw dump of the MCB chain.
MEM displays a list of the DOS memory contents, what free space is available, and how much
memory is in conventional memory, upper memory, the HMA and extended memory. This
program is useful to fine tune the system to have as much free memory as possible for
applications.
Options
The /B option displays BIOS extensions in the range from C000:0 to F800:0.
The /C option shows program, TSR, and device driver sizes.
The /R option shows a low-level DOS listing of MCBs (Memory Control Blocks).
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
ROM-DOS Commands
197
MODE.COM
External Command
The MODE command modifies the operation of the printer, serial port, and active video display.
Syntax
MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE
LPT#[:]=COM#[:]
COM#:baud[,parity[,databits[,stopbits[,P]]]]
<video mode>
<display lines>
Remarks
The first syntax above redirects line printer output to the serial port.
The second syntax above changes the operation of the specified communications port. The options
that can be modified are listed below. InValid for any of the options are flagged with an error
message.
baud 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
parity N - None, O - Odd, E - Even
databits Either 7 or 8
stopbits Either 1 or 2 stop bits
P Printer Port
Using the P option as the last argument causes output to be sent repeatedly to the printer port until
successfully received. Without the P, output is sent only once, causing a critical error if
unsuccessful.
The third syntax changes the active video mode for the display terminal. The valid choices for this
version of the MODE command are as follows:
40—Indicates 40 characters per line.
80—Indicates 80 characters per line.
bw40—For a color graphics adapter with color disabled and 40 characters per line.
bw80—For a color graphics adapter with color disabled and 80 characters per line.
co40—Indicates a color monitor with color enabled and 40 characters per line.
co80—Indicates a color monitor with color enabled and 80 characters per line.
mono—For a monochrome display. Assumes 80 characters per line.
The final syntax sets the number of display lines. Valid included L25, L43, and L50.
Note:
A serial port should be initialized before an LPT device is redirected to it.
Examples
MODE COM1:9600,n,8,1
Modifies the settings for the COM1 device to a baud rate of 9600, no parity, eight data bits, and
one stop bit.
MODE LPT2:=COM2
Redirects the output from LPT2 to the COM2 serial port. All following output to LPT2 actually
goes to the COM2 device.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
198
ROM-DOS Commands
MODE mono
Indicates a monochrome display adapter.
MORE.COM
External Command
The MORE command displays a text file one screen at a time.
Syntax
MORE [filename]
or
<command> | MORE
Remarks
The input to MORE may come from a file, or it may be piped in from another filter or a DOS
command. If the filename is present, then the file is viewed; otherwise MORE reads from the
Standard Input.
Once a screen has been viewed, a line is displayed on the bottom of the screen indicating the
percent of the file that has been viewed. At this point, there are several options for the next lines
of text to be viewed.
B
Display the previous full page.
<enter>
Display just one more line.
T
Display starting at the top of the file.
Spacebar
Display the next full page of text.
Q
Exit MORE
Examples
DIR | MORE
Displays a directory one screen at a time.
MORE READ.ME
Displays the file READ.ME one page at a time.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
ROM-DOS Commands
199
NED.EXE and NED.CFG
External Command
ASCII text Editor Program
The NED editor is a menu-based text editor available for use with ROM-DOS. This editor is
similar to other desktop editors but has special functions designed for use in editing C-source and
assembly code.
Starting the Editor
To start the editor, enter
NED [filename] [filename]
NED may be initiated with or without filename arguments. Wildcard file specifications are
allowed.
Up to ten files can be entered on the command line. If NED is run without arguments, it loads all
files accessed during the last editing session, returning you to the exact position in the file. You
can switch between the open files.
You can also enter
NED @errfile
where errfile is the name of your compiler error output file. NED loads all files that had errors and
allows you to move between errors.
Once NED is running, you may load files into memory by using the File/Open menu command.
File/Reload replaces the current file with a new file or reloads a new copy of the same file.
File/Reload confirms before replacing an unsaved file.
Basic Editor Operation
NED uses the standard Microsoft Windows interface for cut, copy, and paste operations. Del and
Shift+Del both move the selected block to the clipboard. There is no true undo command, but
Ctrl+V or Shift+Ins may be used to paste the clipboard contents to the current cursor position.
Table 1 lists all the default shortcut keys.
If a search string is all lowercase, NED treats it as a case-insensitive search. If a search string
contains any uppercase letters, it is case sensitive. The replacement string is inserted exactly as
entered. Repeating a Search command repeats the last Forward or Backward Search operation, not
the last Replace operation.
There is one bookmark for all files. Once the bookmark is set, going to the bookmark returns you
to the file and position where you set it.
The Indent and Remove-indent (referred to as Undent in the Options/Do Command) commands
work on tabs. Indent inserts a tab at the beginning of the current line, or if a block is active, at the
beginning of each line in the block. Remove-indent removes the first tab from the current line or
from each line in the block. If there are no tabs, Remove-indent has no effect.
Toggle case inverts the case of the current character if no block is active. If a block is active,
Toggle case sets the entire block to uppercase if the first character was lower and to lowercase if
the first character was uppercase.
Tabs are currently set to 3 for .C, .H, .CPP, .HPP, and .T files. They are set to 8 for all other files.
File/Print prints the current block if there is one, otherwise it prints the current file. NED prompts
for a device to print to, which may be a filename. Tabs are expanded to spaces.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
200
ROM-DOS Commands
The Options/Do Command is intended primarily for debugging. This command allows you to
execute any editor command by choosing it from a menu list.
The macro commands (Record Macro/Play Macro) allow you to define a sequence of keystrokes
that can be repeated repetitively. Select Record Macro (ALT=), enter the keystrokes, then press
ALT= again. The macro sequence can be played by selecting Play Macro or by pressing ALT-.
Keyboard bindings are saved in NED.CFG in the same directory as NED.EXE. NED.CFG also
contains the list of active files and positions.
If you record and play a recursive macro, it plays continuously.
If you press an invalid key on a menu, NED operates as if you pressed enter.
If you run out of memory, such as when you have more than 300KB of files open, NED returns to
DOS.
NED Default Hot Keys
Many of the editor commands can be accessed directly by pressing key combinations. For
example, press Alt-X to exit the editor and save any open files. The following table lists the
default hot keys.
Key
Alt-Q
Alt-X
Ctrl-A
Ctrl-B
Ctrl-C
Ctrl-D
Ctrl-E
Ctrl-F
Ctrl-G
Ctrl-I
Ctrl-K
Ctrl-L
Ctrl-M
Ctrl-N
Ctrl-P
Ctrl-Q
Ctrl-R
Ctrl-S
Ctrl-T
Ctrl-U
Ctrl-V
Ctrl-W
Ctrl-X
Ctrl-Z
Alt =
Alt Alt-F7
Alt-F8
MX3 Reference Guide
Function
Quit without saving
Exit, saving as needed
Search again
Search backward
Copy the block to clipboard
Find the mark
Erase to end-of-line
Search forward
Go to a line number
Indent the block
Toggle block mode
Delete line to the clipboard
Set the mark
Read a file into a new buffer
Move to the previous position
Quote the next character
Replace text
Switch to the next buffer
Toggle the case of character(s)
Remove indent from the block
Insert the clipboard
Delete word to the clipboard Ins
Delete block to the clipboard
Cancel the selected block
Start/end recording macro
Playback macro
Previous error
Next error
Key
F1
F7
F9
F10
Left-Arrow
Right-Arrow
Up arrow
Down arrow
Home
End
Page Up
Page Down
Center (5)
Ctrl-Left-Arrow
Ctrl-Right-Arrow
Ctrl-Up-Arrow
Ctrl-Down-Arrow
Ctrl-Home
Ctrl-End
Ctrl-Page
Ctrl-Page
Toggle
Del
Backspace
Ctrl-Ins
Ctrl-BackSpace
Shift-Ins
Shift-Del
Function
Help
Load file into current buffer
Save file
Exit asking for save as needed
Left one character
Right one character
Up one line
Down one line
Beginning of line
End of line
Up one screen
Down one screen
Center the cursor onscreen
Left one word
Right one word
Up one C function
Down one C function
Scroll toward beginning of file
Scroll toward end of file
Up Beginning of file
Down End of file
Insert/Overwrite mode
Delete character
Delete character backward
Copy block to clipboard.
Delete word backward
Insert the clipboard
Delete block to clipboard
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
ROM-DOS Commands
201
PRINT.COM
External Command
The PRINT command prints a single file or a list of files.
Syntax
PRINT [/drive:] [filename] [/options]
Remarks
PRINT allows you to enter between one and 32 files for spooling to the printer. The files are
output to the device in a spooled manner (while you perform other operations).
If PRINT is entered without any parameters, it displays all the files that are in the queue.
The first time PRINT is used, the user is prompted with this message for the device to perform the
operation.
Name of list device [PRN]:
The legal devices for printing are LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4,
AUX, or PRN.
Options
The /B option sets the buffer size. The default buffer size is 512 bytes. A larger buffer size causes
print to operate faster. The maximum buffer size is 32KB and the minimum size is 256 bytes. This
option is only allowed the first time PRINT is run.
The /C option cancels only the filenames listed after the /C command.
The /F option sets the maximum number of files to be queued up at one time. The default number
of files is ten. The minimum is two and the maximum is 32. Support for more files is often useful
when using wildcards in filenames. This option is only allowed the first time PRINT is run (or
until the next system reboot).
The /P option causes all files listed after this option to be submitted for printing. This is the
default for filenames encountered on the PRINT command line.
The /T option cancels all the files from the print queue (list).
The /H option displays the help screen.
Examples
PRINT FILE1.TXT FILE2.TXT FILE3.TXT
Puts three files into the print queue. The first file prints after the command ends.
PRINT /C FILE2.TXT
Removes file FILE2.TXT from the print queue. All other files in the queue print normally.
PRINT /T
Cancels all files in the print queue. Printing may continue for a short time because of the buffer in
your printer.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
202
ROM-DOS Commands
REMDISK.EXE
Remote Disk Program
See Also: REMSERV.EXE
REMSERV is usually run on the MX3 (host). REMDISK is usually run on the client (e.g. a
desktop PC).
The remote disk program allows you to access a disk drive on a remote system via a serial cable
and standard PC-style (8250UART) serial port. In a remote disk setup, one system, the one that
shares its drives, is termed the server. The other system, the one that accesses and uses the remote
drives, is called the client. The serial ports on both systems must be connected via a null modem
cable. Remdisk / Remserv works across a standard 3-pin serial cable. The cable does not require
the CTS/RTS DTS/DTR pins.
To use the remote disk, both REMDISK and REMSERV must be running on their respective
systems and must use the same baud rate and packet or nonpacket-style transmission. After
starting both programs, you can access the new drive on the client system. You can change the
default directory to this new drive, copy files to and from the remote drive, and also run utilities
such as CHKDSK on the drive. The remote drive on the server system can be used as any other
drive on the client system.
Syntax
The program REMDISK runs on the client system and creates a new drive letter for the client.
REMDISK uses the next available system drive letter.
For example, if the last assigned drive was D:, REMDISK creates drive E:. This drive acts like
any other drive, except that it requires the serial port. REMDISK.EXE can be loaded by a
DEVICE= command in the CONFIG.SYS or AUTOEXEC.BAT files or it can be entered at the
DOS prompt.
CONFIG.SYS –-- DEVICE=REMDISK.EXE /T15
AUTOEXEC.BAT – REMDISK /B9600 / COM2 /T10
The syntax for REMDISK is:
REMDISK [/U] [/H] [/Bnnnn] [+|-][/Tnnn] [/COMn]
The default is : /B115K+ /COM1 /T3
Option
Description
/U
Unloads REMDISK from memory, thereby disabling the drive letter and freeing the
memory occupied by REMDISK. This option can only be used when REMDISK is
installed from the DOS command line. A remote disk installed via CONFIG.SYS cannot
be unloaded.
Selects hardware handshaking for flow control.
Selects the baud rate for transmission. Available baud rates are 300, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115000. The default baud rate is 115000.
The plus sign (+) specifies packet-style transmission and is recommended for any baud
rate over 19200. The default setting is to include + for packet transmission. Use the minus
sign (-) to specify polling operation under Microsoft Windows 95. Both sides must agree
on using either (+) or (-).
Sets the time-out in the range of 3 to 3,640 seconds. 15 seconds is not unusual for Flash
drives.
Set the IRQ for the communications port. Valid settings are 3 – 15. Default is IRQ3 for
COM 2 and COM4, and IRQ4 for COM1 and COM3.
Selects the communication port. Choose 1, 2, 3 or 4. COM1 is the default port.
/H
/Bnnnn
+/-
/Tnnn
/IRQn
COMn
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
ROM-DOS Commands
203
To install the REMDISK program from CONFIG.SYS at 19200 baud, on COM1, using packetstyle transmission, insert the following line in CONFIG.SYS and then reboot the system
(remember to include the full path to find REMDISK.EXE if not located in the root directory).
DEVICE=REMDISK.EXE /B19200 +
To display a help screen for REMDISK from the DOS prompt, enter
REMDISK /?
To install REMDISK from the DOS prompt or from a batch file (such as AUTOEXEC.BAT) at
9600 baud, without packet-style transmission, on COM2, enter
REMDISK /B9600 /COM2
To unload the REMDISK installed from the batch file or the DOS prompt, enter REMDISK /U
REMSERV.EXE
Remote Disk Program
See Also: REMDISK.EXE
REMSERV is usually run on the MX3 (host). REMDISK is usually run on the client (e.g. a
desktop PC).
The remote disk program allows you to access a disk drive on a remote system via a serial cable
and standard PC-style (8250UART) serial port. In a remote disk setup, one system, the one that
shares its drives, is termed the server. The other system, the one that accesses and uses the remote
drives, is called the client. The serial ports on both systems must be connected via a null modem
cable. Remdisk / Remserv works across a standard 3-pin serial cable. The cable does not require
the CTS/RTS DTS/DTR pins.
To use the remote disk, both REMDISK and REMSERV must be running on their respective
systems and must use the same baud rate and packet or nonpacket-style transmission. After
starting both programs, you can access the new drive on the client system. You can change the
default directory to this new drive, copy files to and from the remote drive, and also run utilities
such as CHKDSK on the drive. The remote drive on the server system can be used as any other
drive on the client system.
The server system runs the program REMSERV.EXE that can make a single drive on the server
system available to the client. The available drive can be changed at any time by quitting the
REMSERV program and then running the program again with a new drive letter.
The server program can be terminated at any time by pressing the Esc key. The client can then no
longer access the server’s drive until the REMSERV program is run again.
Syntax
REMSERV.EXE d: [/Tnnnn] [/H] [/Bnnnn][+|-] [/COMn] [/IRQn]
[/Tnnn] [/S]
where d: represents the letter of the drive the server makes available to the client.
The default is /B115+ /COM1 /T2
Option
/Bnnnn
+/-
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Description
Selects the baud rate for transmission. Available baud rates are 300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115000. The default baud rate is 115000.
The plus sign (+) after the BAUD specifies packet-style transmission and is
recommended for any baud rate over 19200. The default setting is to include +
for packet transmission. Use the minus sign (-) to specify polling operation under
MX3 Reference Guide
204
ROM-DOS Commands
Option
COMn
/IRQn
/Tnnn
/S
/H
Description
Microsoft Windows 95. By default, packet transfers will be used for all baud
rates higher than 9600. Both sides must agree on using either (+) or (-).
Selects the communication port. Available ports are 1, 2, 3 or 4. COM1 is the
default port.
Set the IRQ for the communications port. Valid settings are 3 – 15. Default is
IRQ3 for COM 2 and COM4, and IRQ4 for COM1 and COM3.
Sets the time-out in the range of 2 to 3,640 seconds. 15 seconds is not unusual
for Flash drives.
Instructs REMSERV to run without any display output (Silent).
Selects hardware handshaking for flow control.
Example
To select drive B: as the available server drive at 115000 baud, packet transmission, using COM1, enter
REMSERV B:
To set drive C: as the server disk at 38400 baud, without packet-style transmission, on COM2,
with a timeout of 10 seconds, enter:
REMSERV C: /B38400 /COM2 /T10
SYS.COM
External Command
The SYS command copies the ROM-DOS system files ROM-DOS.SYS and COMMAND.COM
from the disk in the default drive to the disk in the specified drive. The file ROM-DOS.SYS is
renamed and stored on the disk as files IBMBIO.COM and IBMDOS.COM, which are stored as
hidden files.
Syntax
SYS drive: [/options]
Remarks
Use the SYS command to transfer the ROM-DOS system files to a floppy disk or hard disk. The
disk can be a formatted blank disk or can contain files; it is not necessary for the system files to be
the first files on the disk. The only requirement is that there is enough contiguous free space on
the disk for the new system files to be placed. If the disk already contains system files, installing
the new system files deletes the existing files.
The command processor, COMMAND.COM, is also transferred to the disk and does not need to
be copied into the same contiguous space as the system files.
You can run SYS three different ways. The first is to boot and run your system with ROM-DOS.
When you run the SYS command this way, SYS copies the ROM-DOS system files and
COMMAND.COM from the root directory of the default/current disk drive.
The second method is to run SYS from the root directory of a disk drive that has been previously
prepared with the SYS command, but isn’t booted and running. For example, you can run SYS
from a bootable floppy disk to copy the files to the hard disk without actually booting from the
floppy disk itself.
The third method uses the file ROM-DOS.SYS, the equivalent of the hidden system files
IBMBIO.COM and IBMDOS.COM. ROM-DOS.SYS should be present in the same directory
with COMMAND.COM and SYS.COM. These three files can be placed in the root directory or
subdirectory on a floppy disk (that need not be booted or bootable), or in a subdirectory on the
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
ROM-DOS Commands
205
hard drive. Run the SYS command from the directory where the files reside to transfer the system
files to the destination drive.
Options
The /C option prevents confirmation before transferring system files.
The /H option shows the newly transferred system files on the destination disk.
The /] option prevents display of the sign-on message.
Example
SYS B:
Copies the ROM-DOS system files to drive B:.
VER
Type
Internal
Purpose
Displays the version number of ROM-DOS in use. Allows revision of this version number.
Syntax
VER [n.nn] [/R]
Remarks
If a new version number is specified, two digits after the decimal are required. Note that this
command revises only the record of the DOS version number; it does not change the actual
operating system loaded in the computer.
The version command shows both the version of the VER command itself and the version of DOS
in operation.
Options
The /R option shows the full version and release number of ROM-DOS.
Example
The following example changes the record of current DOS version in use to DOS 5.0. Any
programs that are executed, following this command, will recognize that DOS 5.0 is running.
VER 5.0
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
206
ROM-DOS Commands
XCOPY.COM
External Command
The XCOPY command copies multiple files and, optionally, subdirectories from one disk to
another.
Syntax
XCOPY [source] [target] [/options]
Remarks
Use the XCOPY command to copy multiple files and subdirectories, if they exist.
The source and the target parameter are complete drive-path and file-specification descriptions.
If you do not specify a path, XCOPY assumes the default path. If a filename is not specified, then
*.* is assumed.
The ATTRIB command may be used to modify the archive bit for the various XCOPY options
that check the archive status of files. Refer to the ATTRIB command for instructions.
Options
The /A option copies only source files that have the archive bit set in them. The archive is not
reset.
The /D<mm-dd-yy> option copies only those files with a date later than that specified.
The /E option creates subdirectories on the target even if they are empty.
The /M option copies only those source files that have the archive bit set. Once the source file is
copied, the archive bit is reset.
The /P option prompts before each file is copied. The prompt appears as follows; enter Y to copy
the file:
C:\COMMAND.COM (Y/N)?
The /S option copies files in subdirectories of the source directory.
The /V option verifies each write to the disk.
The /W option waits before starting to copy files and prompts with the following message.
Press any key to begin copying file(s)
Example
XCOPY \bin\*.exe a: /a
Copies all files in the BIN subdirectory to the A: drive that have an .EXE extension and that have
the archive bit set.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
ROM-DOS 6.22 Command Summary
207
ROM-DOS 6.22 Command Summary
For information on ROM-DOS commands, please refer to a commercially available
ROM-DOS user guide.
Following are brief descriptions of ROM-DOS commands, including batch file commands.
Note:
8
The external ROM-DOS files loaded on the MX3 by LXE (and supported by LXE) are
marked with an asterisk in the table that follows. ROM-DOS internal commands are a
part of the ROM-DOS operating system.
ROM-DOS
Command
Command
Type
?
Internal
CONFIG.SYS command. It directs ROM-DOS to pause
for confirmation before processing a command.
@
Internal
Used to suppress the display of a single batch-file
command line.
;
Internal
Identifies nonexecuting lines. The same as the REM
command.
ANSI.SYS*
Installable
A console device driver that allows you to support Ansi
codes on the local screen.
ATTRIB.COM*
External
Displays or modifies the attributes associated with a
file.
BREAK
Internal
Turns on or off the ability to stop program execution at
a non-I/O point.
BUFFERS
Internal
Sets the number of internal data buffers.
CALL
Internal
Batch file command. Invokes execution of a secondary
batch file.
CHDIR (also CD)
Internal
Changes the current directory (also CD).
CHKDSK.COM*
External
Checks the integrity of data on a disk. Displays
information.
CLS
Internal
Clears all information from the monitor’s screen.
COMMAND.COM*
External
Starts a second DOS command processor.
COPY
Internal
Copies files from one storage location to another.
COUNTRY.SYS 8
External
Designates the country code for displays.
CTTY
Internal
Changes the default terminal interacting with ROMDOS.
DATE
Internal
Displays the date from the system’s internal calendar.
Allows revision.
Description
International keyboards and code pages require COUNTRY.SYS, DISPLAY.SYS and
KEYB.COM. These files are placed on the computer when needed. They are not part of the
LXE installed and LXE supported file load.
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
208
ROM-DOS 6.22 Command Summary
ROM-DOS
Command
Command
Type
Description
DEL
Internal
Deletes specified files.
DELTREE.EXE*
External
Deletes one or more directory trees or individual files.
DEVICE
Internal
Installs a device driver into ROM-DOS.
DEVICEHIGH
Internal
Loads a device into the upper memory area, if available.
Internal
DIRectory. Lists contents of a specified directory.
Installable
Displays international letters and symbols.
DOS (ROM-DOS)
Internal
Installs ROM-DOS into High Memory Area (HMA).
ECHO
Internal
Batch file command. Turns on or off display of batch
execution on the monitor.
EGA/EGA3.CPI
Internal
Font data files for use with the International video
display driver, DISPLAY.SYS.
ERASE
Internal
Erases specified files (same as DEL).
EXIT
Internal
Used to exit nested running of ROM-DOS within
another program.
FCBS
Internal
Specifies the number of File Control Blocks (FCBS)
open at one time.
FILES
Internal
Sets the maximum number of files that can be open at
one time on the system.
FOR
Internal
Batch file command. Performs one DOS command on a
set of files.
FORMAT.COM*
External
Initializes a disk so that ROM-DOS can access files on
that disk.
GOTO
Internal
Batch file command. Moves control to a specified line
in the batch file.
HELP
Internal
Lists all available ROM-DOS commands along with
brief descriptions.
HIMEM.SYS*
Installable
Manages extended memory and the high memory area
in a 286, 386, PS/2 system.
IF
Internal
Batch file command. Performs a command based on a
specified condition.
INCLUDE
Internal
Allows instructions in one configuration block to be
included with instructions in another configuration
block.
INSTALL
Internal
Loads Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR) programs
during CONFIG.SYS processing.
DIR
DISPLAY.SYS
9
9
International keyboards and code pages require COUNTRY.SYS, DISPLAY.SYS and
KEYB.COM. These files are placed on the computer when needed. They are not part of the
LXE installed and LXE supported file load.
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
ROM-DOS 6.22 Command Summary
10
209
ROM-DOS
Command
Command
Type
KEYB.COM 10
External
Allows altering of the keyboard layout for a different
language or nationality.
KEYBOARD/
KEYBRD2.SYS
Internal
Keyboard code page data files for use with the
International keyboard driver, KEYB.COM.
LASTDRIVE
Internal
Sets the maximum number of drives.
LOADHIGH
Internal
Loads a program into the upper memory area, if
available.
MEM.EXE*
External
Displays the used and free memory in your system.
MENUCOLOR
Internal
Allows setting of text and background colors for the
startup menu.
MENUDEFAULT
Internal
Sets the default menu-item choice and time-out value
for making a selection.
MENUITEM
Internal
Specifies an item to be placed on the startup menu
display during system boot
MKDIR
Internal
Creates a new subdirectory.
MODE.COM*
External
Modifies the operation of the printer, serial port, and
active video display.
MORE.COM*
External
Displays a text file one screen at a time.
MOVE.EXE
Internal
Moves files and renames files and directories.
NED.CFG*
Installable
Configuration file for NED.EXE ASCII text editor.
NED.EXE*
Installable
This program is used when editing ASCII text files.
NEWFILE
Internal
Allows continuation of CONFIG.SYS processing from
a new file.
NUMLOCK
Internal
Sets the NUMLOCK keyboard key to on or off when
your computer starts. This setting is ignored by the
VXX OS.
PATH
Internal
Displays current command search path(s). A new path
line can be specified.
PAUSE
Internal
Batch file command. Causes execution to halt until a
key is pressed.
PRINT.COM*
External
Prints a list of files, up to ten files.
PROMPT
Internal
Resets the appearance of the system prompt line.
REM
Internal
A batch file command for identifying non-executing
lines.
Description
International keyboards and code pages require COUNTRY.SYS, DISPLAY.SYS and
KEYB.COM. These files are placed on the computer when needed. They are not part of the
LXE installed and LXE supported file load..
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
MX3 Reference Guide
210
ROM-DOS 6.22 Command Summary
ROM-DOS
Command
Command
Type
REMDISK.EXE*
Installable
A remote disk management program. Usually run on
the client.
REMSERV.EXE*
Installable
A remote disk management program. Usually run on
the host.
REN
Internal
Renames files.
RMDIR (also RM)
Internal
Deletes a specified subdirectory.
SET
Internal
Sets environment variables and command processor
strings.
SHELL
Internal
Allows selections of a command interpreter other than
COMMAND.COM.
SHIFT
Internal
Batch file command. Shifts replaceable parameters one
position to the left.
STACKDEV.SYS
Internal
Increases the number of stacks available for IRQ
handlers and Int13h.
STACKS
Internal
Allows for the use of dynamic data stacks to handle
interrupts.
SUBMENU
Internal
Defines a menu item that represents a secondary menu.
SWITCHES
Internal
Allows special CONFIG.SYS file options.
SYS.COM*
External
Transfers the hidden system files to a specified drive.
TIME
Internal
Displays current time from the system’s internal clock.
Also allows revision.
TYPE
Internal
Displays the contents of a text file on the monitor.
UMBLINK.SYS
UMBLINK.EXE
Internal
A non-protected mode program that can allow the
creation of Upper Memory Blocks using existing RAM
areas.
VER*
Internal
Displays current version of ROM-DOS on the monitor.
VERIFY
Internal
Displays the current VERIFY state or sets the VERIFY
state to on or off.
VERSION.SYS
Internal
Modifies the version number ROM-DOS reports.
VOL
Internal
Displays the volume label on a disk.
XCOPY.COM*
External
Copies multiple files and optionally subdirectories.
MX3 Reference Guide
Description
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Index
; @ ? ....................................................................207
2nd key function ......................................................39
3270 and 5250 TE
Ctrl key function .................................................39
6224 Session Manager.............................................60
A
Access BIOS Setup..................................................78
Accessories
Electrostatic Discharge .........................................5
Installing ...............................................................5
AGENT.EXE...........................................................77
Aggressive CPU Setting ..........................................86
Allocation units, lost
and CHKDSK ...................................................190
Allow Caps Function...............................................91
Alt key function.......................................................39
ANSI.SYS .......................................................56, 188
AP_Distance
NET.CFG parameter .........................................128
API
Application Programmer’s Interface...................94
Sample Code .......................................................94
Software Interrupt ...............................................94
API Function Utility ..............................................118
APPS .......................................................................77
APPS\AVAF ...........................................................77
Archives.....................................................................1
AT-compatible core logic........................................24
ATTRIB.EXE........................................................189
Auto-Detect ...........................................................116
Auto-Detect Utility
How To .............................................................116
AUTOEXEC.BAT.............................................55, 63
2.4 Sample ..........................................................65
900 Sample .........................................................64
AVA ........................................................................77
Avalanche ................................................................76
AWCO48C ..............................................................61
B
Backup Battery
Discharge Utility...............................................113
Maintenance........................................................50
Replacement........................................................50
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Test Utility ........................................................113
Time Limit ..........................................................51
Bad or missing Command Interpreter............156, 157
Barcode
Data Entry ...........................................................18
Barcode scanner in endcap ................................11, 44
Batch units and TEs...........................................19, 59
Batteries.................................................................182
Battery
Backup ................................................................50
Charge New ..........................................................5
Charger................................................................48
Charging..............................................................25
Handling Safely ..................................................51
Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) ...........................................25
Low Warning timing...........................................47
Nickel Cadmium (NiCad) ...................................25
Battery Compartment ................................................7
Battery Discharge Utility.................................50, 113
Battery Life
Approximate .......................................................47
Battery, charge before using......................................6
Battery, How To ........................................................7
BBDIS81.EXE ........................................58, 111, 113
BBTST81.EXE........................................58, 111, 113
BCWEDGE ...........................................................109
BCWEDGE.EXE.............................................58, 109
BEEP81.EXE ..........................................58, 111, 113
Beeper Test Utility.................................................113
BIOS
Advanced Menu
Keyboard .......................................................91
Other..............................................................92
Other menu....................................................92
Power Mgt.....................................................85
Boot.....................................................................81
Caps ....................................................................91
COM1 Pin9 .........................................................92
COM2 Pin9 .........................................................92
CPU.....................................................................86
CtlAltDel.............................................................91
Date.....................................................................81
Disp BL...............................................................87
Display ................................................................87
Docked PM .........................................................90
Exit Menu ...........................................................93
Exit w/o Save ......................................................93
Font .....................................................................92
MX3 Reference Guide
212
Index
Left Scan .............................................................85
Load Defaults......................................................93
Load Previous .....................................................93
NumLock ............................................................91
Post Msg .............................................................82
Power Key...........................................................90
Power Mgt...........................................................85
Right Scan...........................................................86
Rpt Delay ............................................................91
Rpt Rate ..............................................................91
Save and Exit ......................................................93
Save Changes ......................................................93
Setup Msg ...........................................................81
Summary .............................................................83
Suspend...............................................................88
Time ....................................................................80
Touch Wake........................................................90
BIOS Setup
Advanced Menu ..................................................84
Main Menu..........................................................80
Parameter Changes..............................................78
Boot .........................................................................81
Boot Order
Verifying...........................................................157
BOOTP..................................................................140
Borland C/C++ Version 4.5...................................103
BREAK, Internal File ............................................207
BUFFERS, Internal File ........................................207
BusType
NET.CFG parameter .........................................135
Bypass Configuration Files ...................................156
COM Port Switching .........................................11, 44
COM Port Test Utility ...........................................114
COM1 Pin9..............................................................92
COM2 Pin9..............................................................92
Command Summary ..............................................207
COMMAND.COM............................56, 63, 157, 191
Components, Location ...........................................2
COMTST81.EXE ....................................58, 111, 114
Condition, Restore...................................................93
CONFIG.SYS....................................................55, 63
Sample ................................................................66
Configuration...........................................................63
Configuration Files
Bypass...............................................................156
Contacting LXE.........................................................1
Conventional Memory...........................................169
Convert MS-DOS to ROM-DOS...........................169
COPY, Internal File...............................................207
COUNTRY.SYS, External File.............................207
CPU ...........................................................23, 86, 181
CPU Custom Setting................................................86
Cradles, storage and function ..................................46
Critical Suspend...........................................51, 85, 89
State ....................................................................31
what happens when .............................................49
Critical Suspend mode.............................................29
Critical Suspend state ..............................................49
CtlAltDel .................................................................91
Ctrl key function......................................................39
CTTY, Internal File ...............................................207
Custom CPU Setting................................................86
C
D
CALL, Internal File ...............................................207
Caps .........................................................................91
Caps mode function.................................................40
Card_Power_Management
NET.CFG parameter .........................................138
CFGAGENT.EXE ...................................................77
Channel
NET.CFG parameter .........................................132
Charger
Battery.................................................................48
Charging Battery
Time Required ....................................................25
CHDIR, Internal File .............................................207
CHKDSK.EXE................................................56, 190
Cisco Specific Radio Driver ....................................61
CISDUMP ...............................................................57
Cleaning
Display ................................................................34
CLS, Internal File ..................................................207
CMOS time and date not set..................................156
CNFIGNAM.EXE ...................................................57
Data Entry
Barcode, RS-232 and Keyboard .........................18
Datalight ROM-DOS commands...........................187
DataRateX
NET.CFG parameter .........................................134
Date .........................................................................81
DATE
Internal File.......................................................207
Default
CPU Setting ........................................................86
NED Hot Keys ..........................................123, 200
Default Font.............................................................92
Default Value
Delay Off Timer..................................................29
Default Values, Load...............................................93
Defaults
BIOS parameters.................................................79
DEINSTAL.EXE...................................................164
DEL, Internal File..................................................207
DELTREE.EXE.....................................................192
DEVICE, Internal File...........................................208
MX3 Reference Guide
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Index
DEVICEHIGH, Internal File.................................208
Devices, Optional
Troubleshooting ................................................166
DHCP ....................................................................140
Digitizer Calibration Utility.....................................58
Digitizer Test Utility................................................58
Dimensions ............................................................182
DIR, Internal File...................................................208
Directory............................................................19, 59
Directory File Listing ..............................................55
Directory Structure, Drive C
Avalanche ...........................................................77
Discard BIOS Parameter Changes...........................93
Disp BL ...................................................................87
DISP81.EXE............................................58, 111, 115
Display.............................................................87, 181
Cleaning ..............................................................34
Description..........................................................32
Panning ...............................................................33
Repair..................................................................34
Size......................................................................32
Specifications....................................................184
Troubleshooting ................................................163
Display Backlight Timer .........................................33
Display POST Errors...............................................82
Display Timer ..........................................................33
Display Window......................................................33
Display window size................................................33
DISPLAY.SYS, External File ...............................208
Diversity
NET.CFG parameter .........................................135
Docked PM..............................................................90
Docking Cradle......................................................101
Docking Stations
and Power Mgt BIOS parameter.........................90
Document Conventions .............................................4
domain
Socket parameter...............................................143
Domain
NET.CFG parameter .........................................131
DOS (ROM-DOS), Internal File ...........................208
DOS boot SRAM card...............................................5
DOS Configuration..................................................63
DOS Files ................................................................53
DOS key functions unavailable ...............................40
DOS Menu
Internal
MENUCOLOR ...........................................209
MENUDEFAULT.......................................209
MENUITEM ...............................................209
SUBMENU .................................................210
DPMS.EXE .............................................................57
DRIVER.1ST ..........................................................61
Dual TE Menu .........................................................60
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
213
E
ECHO, Internal File...............................................208
EGA/EGA3.CPI, Internal Files .............................208
Electrostatic Discharge ......................................13, 15
Enable_Encryption
NET.CFG parameter .........................................130
Endcap .....................................................................12
Endcaps
COM1 and COM2...............................................11
Enter key function ...................................................39
Environmental Specifications................................183
ERASE, Internal File.............................................208
Error Messages ......................................................156
Errors
POST...................................................................82
Exit and Save...........................................................93
Exit Menu
Exit w/o Save ......................................................93
Load Defaults......................................................93
Load Previous .....................................................93
Save and Exit ......................................................93
Save Changes ......................................................93
Exit w/o Save...........................................................93
EXIT, Internal File ................................................208
Extended Memory .................................................169
External Connectors/Interface ...............................182
F
Failure
Battery Pack ........................................................50
FCBS, Internal File................................................208
Features .....................................................................1
Field Exit key function ............................................39
File Allocation Table (FAT)..................................190
FILES, Internal File...............................................208
Flash or Hard Disk
Troubleshooting ................................................163
Font..........................................................................92
Font size in pixels, chart..........................................33
Font Sizes ................................................................32
FOR, Internal File..................................................208
Force Suspend State ................................................29
FORMAT.COM ..............................................56, 193
FragThreshold
NET.CFG parameter .........................................134
Frame
NET.CFG parameter .........................................135
FTP Kernel
Troubleshooting ................................................168
Full Speed CPU Setting...........................................86
Function
2nd Key...............................................................39
MX3 Reference Guide
214
Alt Key................................................................39
Caps Mode ..........................................................40
Ctrl Key...............................................................39
Enter Key ............................................................39
Field Exit Key .....................................................39
Power Key.....................................................29, 90
Scan Key .............................................................38
Shft Key ..............................................................39
Spc Key...............................................................40
G
Getting Help ..............................................................1
Getting Started...........................................................5
Getting the Most from Your Batteries .....................51
GOTO, Internal File ..............................................208
Graphics, VGA ........................................................32
H
Handling Batteries ...................................................51
Handstrap, How To ...................................................8
Hard Disk or Flash
Troubleshooting ................................................163
Hardware
Configuration ......................................................23
Troubleshooting ................................................161
Help ...................................................................1, 172
HELP, Internal File ...............................................208
HIMEM.SYS ...................................................56, 194
Hot Keys, NED editor ...................................123, 200
Hot Swapping Main Battery ....................................51
How To
File Transfer................................................99, 101
Get Help............................................................172
Print...........................................................100, 102
Radio Card ..........................................................15
Set System Time and Date ................................160
I
IEC IP55 ................................................................183
IF, Internal File......................................................208
iface
Socket parameter...............................................143
Inactivity_min
NET.CFG parameter .........................................132
Inactivity_sec
NET.CFG parameter .........................................132
INCLUDE, Internal File ........................................208
InfraRed Port ...........................................................43
Initialize_365
NET.CFG parameter .........................................132
INSTALL, Internal File.........................................208
MX3 Reference Guide
Index
Int
NET.CFG parameter .........................................131
interface
Socket parameter...............................................143
Internal Flash Array (IFA).................................24, 53
Internal Flash Array (IFA) and Bootup ...................78
ip
Socket parameter...............................................146
IPSTAT.EXE...........................................................61
IR operating envelope........................................43, 97
IR Operating Envelope ............................................99
IR Port .....................................................................43
IrDA Lite Plus ...................................................43, 97
and Docking Cradle ..........................................101
File Transfer................................................99, 100
Print...................................................................100
Quick Start ..........................................................98
Setup ...................................................................97
IRECV.C .........................................................98, 103
IRPLUS.EXE ..........................................................57
IRQ
NET.CFG parameter .........................................135
Troubleshooting ................................................165
IRSEND.C.......................................................98, 103
K
Key Map, ANSI Plus.............................................173
Key Map, LDS Plus...............................................173
KEY2381.EXE ........................................58, 111, 115
Keyboard
Caps ....................................................................91
CtlAltDel.............................................................91
Data Entry ...........................................................18
NumLock ............................................................91
Rpt Delay ............................................................91
Rpt Rate ..............................................................91
Keyboard Key Label Test......................................115
KEYBOARD, Internal File ...................................209
KEYBRD2.SYS, Internal File...............................209
Keypad
Troubleshooting ................................................161
Keypads ...................................................................36
Backlight.............................................................36
Keypads, overlays....................................................37
Keypress Delay Rate ...............................................91
Keypress Repeat Delay............................................91
Keypresses
BIOS ...................................................................78
L
LASTDRIVE, Internal File ...................................209
LEDs
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Index
2nd function ........................................................41
ALT function ......................................................41
BATT B function ................................................42
BATT M function ...............................................42
CAPS function ....................................................41
CHGR function ...................................................42
CTRL function ....................................................41
Notification/Status ..............................................30
on keypads,location.............................................41
SCNR function....................................................42
SHFT function ....................................................41
STAT function ....................................................42
Left Scan..................................................................85
Light CPU Setting ...................................................86
Li-Ion
1400 mAh ...........................................................25
1800 mAh ...........................................................25
Link Support
NET.CFG parameter .................128, 131, 133, 137
Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion)................................................47
Load Defaults ..........................................................93
Load Previous..........................................................93
LOADHIGH, Internal File ....................................209
Location, Components ...........................................2
Loopback Connector
for RS-232 Endcap COM Port Test Utility.......114
Lost chains.............................................................190
Low Battery Warning ..............................................48
Low Main Battery....................................................30
LSL.COM................................................................61
Lucent Specific Radio Driver ..................................61
LXE and ROM-DOS commands ...........................187
LXE BCWEDGE...................................................109
LXE Customer Support .........................................172
LXE900SS.EXE ......................................................62
LXE900SS.HEX......................................................62
LXEF.EXE ..............................................58, 111, 115
M
Mac_optimize
NET.CFG parameter .........................................132
Main Battery
and Critical Suspend state ...................................51
components ...........................................................6
Hot Swapping .....................................................51
Main Battery is depleted..........................................30
Main Battery Low Warning.....................................30
Main Battery Pack ...................................................47
Main Battery Power Failure ..............................30, 49
Main system memory ..............................................24
Maintenance, required
Backup Battery....................................................50
Manuals ...................................................................21
Mass Storage .........................................................181
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
215
Maximum_Sleep_Duration
NET.CFG parameter .........................................130
MaxPowerSave
NET.CFG parameter .........................................134
Medium_Reservation
NET.CFG parameter .........................................129
Mem#1 (ODI)
NET.CFG parameter .........................................131
MEM.EXE.......................................................56, 196
Memory .................................................................181
NET.CFG parameter .........................................135
Troubleshooting ................................................169
Memory Map ...........................................................26
Microsoft Windows .................................................18
Microwave_Oven_Robustness
NET.CFG parameter .........................................129
Minimum Software Baseline
Avalanche ...........................................................76
Missing Files .........................................................207
MKDIR, Internal File ............................................209
Mode Key Functions ...............................................40
MODE.COM ...................................................56, 197
Moderate CPU Setting.............................................86
MORE.COM ...................................................56, 198
MOVE.EXE, Internal File .....................................209
MX3 Reference Guide...............................................1
N
NED editor ....................................................122, 199
NED.CFG ........................................................56, 209
NED.EXE ........................................................56, 209
NET.CFG ........................................................61, 127
and Touchscreen .................................................34
Sample
Cisco..................................................69, 71, 72
Lucent............................................................67
Proxim ...........................................................68
New Battery...............................................................5
NEWFILE, Internal File........................................209
NiCad.......................................................................47
NiCAD
50 mAh ...............................................................25
Nickel-Cadmium (NiCad) .......................................47
NodeName
NET.CFG parameter .........................................134
Non-System disk or disk error...............................156
NumLock
NUMLOCK, DOS Command...........................209
NUMLOCK, Internal File .....................................209
O
O’Neill MicroFlash ...............................................100
MX3 Reference Guide
216
Obsolete devices........................................................1
ODIPKT.COM ........................................................61
Off Timer.................................................................31
Default Value ......................................................29
On/Off Switch .........................................................29
Operating Temperature..........................................183
US AC to DC ....................................................183
WW AC to DC..................................................184
Other
COM1 Pin9 .........................................................92
COM2 Pin9 .........................................................92
Font .....................................................................92
P
Panning the display..................................................33
param
Socket parameter...............................................147
PARAM.DAT........................................................116
PARAM81.EXE ......................................58, 111, 116
Parameter Auto-Detect Utility...............................116
Parameter Changes
BIOS ...................................................................80
Parameters
NET.CFG
Cisco....................................................133, 137
Lucent..........................................................128
Proxim .........................................................131
Parameters, BCWEDGE........................................109
PATH, Internal File ...............................................209
PAUSE, Internal File.............................................209
PC Card ...................................................................13
Storage ................................................................14
PC card management software
Required..............................................................13
PC Card Slot 1 .........................................................13
PC card slots ............................................................13
PC Radio..................................................................15
PCM.EXE................................................................57
PCM.INI ..................................................................57
PCMATA.SYS ........................................................57
PCMCIA..................................................................13
PCMCIA Cards
Troubleshooting ................................................164
PCMCIA Directory .................................................57
PCMCIA Interface.................................................181
PCMCIA Radio .......................................................15
PCMCIA Slots.........................................................28
PCMCS.EXE ...........................................................57
PCMFDISK.EXE ....................................................57
PCMRMAN.SYS ....................................................57
PCMSCD.EXE ........................................................57
PCMSS.EXE ...........................................................57
PCRFLIB.EXE ........................................................62
PDTEST.EXE..........................................................61
MX3 Reference Guide
Index
Peer_to_peer
NET.CFG parameter .........................................132
Physical Controls.....................................................29
Physical Specifications ..........................................181
Ping, use XPING.EXE ............................................61
Port
NET.CFG parameter .........................................131
PortBase
NET.CFG parameter .........................................135
POST Messages
Beep Codes .......................................................171
Error Messages .................................................170
Post Msg ..................................................................82
Power
On and Off, How To ...........................................10
Power button............................................................29
and suspend mode ...............................................10
Power Connector ...................................................182
Power Key ...............................................................90
Power Light .............................................................29
Power Management
and the Keypad ...................................................31
Power Mgt ...............................................................85
CPU.....................................................................86
Disp BL (time) ....................................................87
Disp BL (timer)...................................................87
Display ................................................................87
Docked PM .........................................................90
Left Scan .............................................................85
Power Key...........................................................90
Power Mgt...........................................................85
Right Scan...........................................................86
Suspend...............................................................88
Touch Wake........................................................90
Power Mgt and CPU Setting ...................................86
Power Mgt and Delay Off .......................................85
Power Off
Forced ...................................................10, 91, 161
Power On Self Test (POST) ..................................170
Power Source
Troubleshooting ................................................161
Power Status LED ...................................................30
Power Supply ..........................................................47
Battery Packs ......................................................25
Power Switch...........................................................29
PowerSaveMode
NET.CFG parameter .........................................134
Pre-loaded DOS Files ..............................................53
Print ...............................................................100, 102
PRINT.COM .........................................................201
Problem Solving ....................................................155
Programmable Buttons ............................................38
PROMPT, Internal File .........................................209
Protocol
NET.CFG parameter .................128, 131, 133, 137
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Index
PROTOCOL.INI .....................................................85
Proxim Specific Radio Driver .................................61
Q
Quick Start Instructions.............................................5
R
Radio
Troubleshooting ................................................167
radio driver software
Required..............................................................15
Radio Specifications ..............................................185
RAM........................................................................29
Real time clock failure...........................................156
Reboot .....................................................................40
Reboot permission ...................................................91
Receive_All_Multicasts
NET.CFG parameter .........................................130
RefreshInterval
NET.CFG parameter .........................................134
REM, Internal File.................................................209
REMDISK .............................................................202
REMDISK.EXE ..............................56, 125, 202, 210
REMSERV.EXE .............................56, 124, 203, 210
REN, Internal File .................................................210
Repair Display .........................................................34
Reset Key Sequence ................................................40
Restore.....................................................................93
Restore BIOS from Flash ........................................93
RF and Suspend Timers...........................................85
RFPARSE.EXE .......................................................62
Right Scan ...............................................................86
RL2PCM.COM .......................................................61
RMDIR, Internal File ............................................210
Roam_config
NET.CFG parameter .........................................132
ROM-DOS command processor............................191
ROM-DOS commands ..........................................187
Root Directory .........................................................55
route
Socket parameter...............................................149
Rpt Delay.................................................................91
Rpt Rate ...................................................................91
RS-232
Data Entry ...........................................................18
RS-232 Pinouts........................................................45
RTSThreshold
NET.CFG parameter .........................................134
S
Sample Files ............................................................64
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
217
Save and Exit...........................................................93
Save BIOS Parameter Changes ...............................93
Save Changes ..........................................................93
Save to CMOS RAM...............................................79
Scan button
and Tethered Scanners ..................................11, 44
Scan key function ....................................................38
Scanner Configuration Utility ...............................117
Scanner in endcap..............................................11, 44
Scanner indicator .....................................................44
Screen or Display Test Utility ...............................115
Screwdriver
Phillips, for handstrap ...........................................8
SCU.EXE ................................................58, 112, 117
Select Boot Sequence ..............................................81
Serial Port endcap..............................................12, 45
Serial to infrared converter cable
and a PC ..............................................................97
Set COM 1 Port Pin9 Setting...................................92
Set COM 2 Port Pin9 Setting...................................92
Set Display Backlight Mode....................................87
Set Display Backlight Timer ...................................87
Set Display Timer....................................................87
Set Left Button ........................................................85
Set Right Button ......................................................86
Set System Date.......................................................81
Set System Time......................................................80
SET, Internal File ..................................................210
SETAPI_4.EXE.......................................58, 112, 118
SETHOST.EXE.......................................................61
Setting SOCKETS.CFG Parameters......................141
Setup Msg................................................................81
SHELL, Internal File .............................................210
Shift key function ....................................................39
SHIFT, Internal File ..............................................210
Show Summary Screen............................................83
Show System Prompt...............................................81
Shutdown time limits...............................................48
SLAINIT .................................................................61
Slot 0
Lower Slot...........................................................28
Slot 1
Upper Slot ...........................................................28
Socket
domain ..............................................................143
iface...................................................................143
interface ............................................................143
ip parameter ......................................................146
NET.CFG parameter .................................131, 135
param ................................................................147
route ..................................................................149
tcp......................................................................151
SOCKET.CFG.................................................61, 140
Sample ................................................................74
SOCKETP.EXE...............................................61, 140
MX3 Reference Guide
218
Sockets TCP/IP Stack............................................140
Software
Troubleshooting ................................................168
Software and Files ...................................................53
Space key function ..................................................40
SRAM or Flash PCMCIA .....................................181
SSID
NET.CFG parameter .........................................134
STACKDEV.SYS, Internal File............................210
STACKS, Internal File ..........................................210
Startup
Troubleshooting ................................................156
Station_Name
NET.CFG parameter .........................................128
Station_type
NET.CFG parameter .........................................131
Status LED ..............................................................30
Status/Notification LED ..........................................30
Storage Temperature .............................................183
US AC to DC ....................................................183
WW AC to DC..................................................184
Stored Forms
Space required.....................................................20
Storing PC Cards .....................................................14
Subchannel
NET.CFG parameter .........................................132
Subdirectory
DOS ....................................................................56
PCTCP ................................................................61
Summary..................................................................83
Summary, ROM-DOS Commands ........................207
Suspend
Power Key...........................................................90
Timer...................................................................88
Touch ..................................................................90
Suspend State ....................................................29, 31
Suspend Timer.........................................................29
Suspend Timers
and CPU and RF Communication.......................85
SWITCHES, Internal File .....................................210
Symbol Specific Radio Driver.................................61
SYS.COM........................................................56, 204
System Configuration ........................................53, 63
DOS Configuration
AUTOEXEC.BAT ........................................63
COMMAND.COM .......................................63
CONFIG.SYS................................................63
System Hardware Configuration .............................23
System Setup
IrDA Lite Plus.....................................................97
System Suspend Timer ............................................88
T
tcp
MX3 Reference Guide
Index
Socket parameter...............................................151
TCP.EXE .................................................................61
TCP/IP Stack .........................................................140
TE Directories ...................................................19, 59
TE screen and font sizes ..........................................20
Technical Specifications........................................181
Terminal Emulation Programs...................................1
Terminal Emulations
ANSI Plus ...........................................................19
DOS 3270 ...........................................................19
DOS 5250 ...........................................................19
LDS Plus .............................................................19
TN3270 ...............................................................19
TN5250 ...............................................................19
TERMTYPE.EXE, Function ...................................55
TESELECT.BAT.....................................................60
Tethered scanner
and the Scan button.......................................11, 44
Time.........................................................................80
TIME, Internal File................................................210
Timer
Off.......................................................................29
Touch Wake ............................................................90
Touchscreen.............................................................34
and NET.CFG file...............................................34
Display backlighting effect .................................34
Touchscreen Calibration........................................120
Transmit_Key_ID
NET.CFG parameter .........................................130
Transmit_Rate
NET.CFG parameter .........................................129
Troubleshooting.....................................................155
Hard Disk or Flash ............................................163
Power Off..............................................10, 91, 161
TSCAL.EXE............................................58, 112, 120
TSTEST.EXE ..........................................58, 112, 120
Type II radio ............................................................15
TYPE, Internal File ...............................................210
U
UMBLINK.EXE, Internal File ..............................210
UMBLINK.SYS, Internal File...............................210
Unavailable
DOS key functions..............................................40
Upper Memory Block (UMB) .................................24
Upper Memory Conflicts
Troubleshooting ................................................165
Using the Keypad
BIOS ...................................................................78
Utilities ....................................................................95
BBDIS81.EXE ..................................................113
BBTST81.EXE .................................................113
BEEP81.EXE ....................................................113
COMTST81.EXE..............................................114
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Index
DISP81.EXE .....................................................115
KEY2381.EXE .................................................115
Parameter Auto-Detect......................................116
SCU.EXE..........................................................117
SETAPI_4.EXE ................................................118
Enable COM2..............................................119
TSCAL.EXE .....................................................120
TSTEST.EXE ...................................................120
UTILS Directory .....................................................58
V
VER .........................................................................56
VER and ROM-DOS.............................................205
VER, Internal File .................................................210
Verify Boot Order..................................................157
VERIFY, Internal File ...........................................210
VERSION.SYS, Internal File................................210
VGA Text and Graphics....................................24, 32
Video Subsystem
Character Size ...............................................24, 32
Display Characteristics .......................................24
Virtual Screen..........................................................33
Virtual screen segment
Top left corner ....................................................33
Virtual screen size ...................................................33
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
219
VOL, Internal File .................................................210
W
Wake the MX3 from Suspend .................................29
Wake Up..................................................................31
Warning
Low Battery beeps ..............................................48
WaveLAN_Network_Name
NET.CFG parameter .................................128, 137
Wavelink Avalanche ...............................................76
Weights..................................................................181
WEP enable
NET.CFG parameter .........................................135
WEPDOS utility ....................................................136
WEPDOS.EXE........................................................61
When to use this guide ..............................................3
WVLAN43 (all WVLAN44 files)...........................61
X
XCOPY.COM .......................................................206
XCOPY.EXE...........................................................56
XPING.EXE ............................................................61
MX3 Reference Guide
220
MX3 Reference Guide
Index
E-EQ-MX3RG-J-ARC
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement